WO2007077751A1 - Ink-jet ink composition for color filter, color filter, process for producing the same, and liquid-crystal display - Google Patents

Ink-jet ink composition for color filter, color filter, process for producing the same, and liquid-crystal display Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007077751A1
WO2007077751A1 PCT/JP2006/325495 JP2006325495W WO2007077751A1 WO 2007077751 A1 WO2007077751 A1 WO 2007077751A1 JP 2006325495 W JP2006325495 W JP 2006325495W WO 2007077751 A1 WO2007077751 A1 WO 2007077751A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
color filter
pigment
ink
ink composition
mass
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2006/325495
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Hideaki Ito
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corporation filed Critical Fujifilm Corporation
Priority to JP2007552909A priority Critical patent/JPWO2007077751A1/en
Publication of WO2007077751A1 publication Critical patent/WO2007077751A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D11/00Inks
    • C09D11/02Printing inks
    • C09D11/10Printing inks based on artificial resins
    • C09D11/101Inks specially adapted for printing processes involving curing by wave energy or particle radiation, e.g. with UV-curing following the printing
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41MPRINTING, DUPLICATING, MARKING, OR COPYING PROCESSES; COLOUR PRINTING
    • B41M5/00Duplicating or marking methods; Sheet materials for use therein
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/133509Filters, e.g. light shielding masks
    • G02F1/133514Colour filters
    • G02F1/133516Methods for their manufacture, e.g. printing, electro-deposition or photolithography

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an ink composition for an inkjet color filter that is suitable for forming colored pixels by applying droplets by an inkjet method, a color filter in which colored pixels are applied by droplets by an inkjet method, and the same
  • the present invention relates to a manufacturing method and a liquid crystal display device.
  • a color filter for a display device is provided in a dot shape, for example, by arranging dot-like images such as red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in a matrix on a substrate such as glass. It has a structure in which images are separated from each other by a dark color separation wall such as a black matrix.
  • color filters have been colored by (1) dyeing method, (2) printing method, (3) application of colored photosensitive resin solution, exposure, and development.
  • Method for forming a pattern image (colored resist method; see, for example, Patent Documents 1 to 3)
  • Method for sequentially transferring a pattern image formed on a temporary support onto a final or temporary substrate See, for example, Patent Documents 4 to 6
  • a photosensitive colored layer is formed by applying a colored photosensitive resin solution on a temporary support in advance, and the photosensitive colored layer is finally or
  • a method (transfer method) for forming a colored pattern image by directly transferring, exposing and developing on a temporary substrate is known (for example, see Patent Document 7).
  • a method using an ink jet method is also known (see, for example, Patent Document 8).
  • the colored resist method can produce a color filter with high positional accuracy.
  • the colored resist method is not advantageous in terms of cost due to a large loss in the application of the photosensitive layer resin solution.
  • the ink jet method there is a tendency that it is difficult to obtain a pixel with good force position accuracy that is less costly and less costly.
  • a method has been proposed in which a black matrix is formed by a colored resist method, and then a colored pattern (pixel) such as RGB is formed by using an inkjet method.
  • a colored ink R, G, B, etc.
  • a recess colored layer forming region
  • a partition such as a black matrix
  • the solid content concentration is low, a desired thickness cannot be obtained after drying unless the amount of droplet ejection is sufficient. Therefore, it is necessary to deposit colored ink over the volume of the recess surrounded by the partition walls.
  • irregularities occur in the vicinity of the partition walls in the colored layer (pixels), which causes display unevenness when a display device (panel) is formed.
  • Patent Document 10 JP-A 63-298304
  • Patent Document 2 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 63-309916
  • Patent Document 3 JP-A-1 152449
  • Patent Document 4 JP-A 61-99103
  • Patent Document 5 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 61-233704
  • Patent Document 6 JP-A 61-279802
  • Patent Document 7 JP-A-61-99102
  • Patent Document 8 JP-A-8-227012
  • Patent Document 9 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-337424
  • Patent Document 10 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-310706
  • an inkjet method is used between partition walls (dark color separation walls) formed in advance on a substrate.
  • Various studies have been made on techniques for forming pixel patterns by ejecting more liquid ink.
  • the surface of the colored area that becomes the pixel has an uneven shape, and immediately after the solvent is dried, simply containing a fluorine-based surfactant or the like. It is difficult to form a colored layer (pixel pattern) with good flatness.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is excellent in flatness of a colored region (particularly in the vicinity of a dark color separation wall) formed by applying droplets by an inkjet method having high versatility.
  • An ink composition for an inkjet color filter capable of obtaining a color filter (including colored pixels constituting the color filter) is provided.
  • the present invention has no display unevenness and high display quality.
  • V a color filter, a manufacturing method thereof, and a liquid crystal display device are provided.
  • An ink jet color filter ink composition used for forming a colored region formed by applying droplets by an inkjet method comprising a colorant and a fluorosurfactant, wherein the fluorosurfactant comprises A structural unit derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (a) and at least one structural unit b derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (b):
  • An ink composition for an inkjet color filter which is a copolymer that is a copolymer having a mass ratio (aZb) of a to the structural unit b of 20Z80 to 60Z40.
  • R are each independently a hydrogen atom or a Represents a til group.
  • R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • m represents an integer of 2 to 14, and
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 18.
  • p and q each independently represent an integer of 0 to 18, and p and q do not represent 0 at the same time.
  • ⁇ 2> Content power of the fluorosurfactant Inkjet color filter as described in ⁇ 1> above, which is 0.01 to 0.2% by mass of the total mass of the ink yarn and the composition. It is an ink composition.
  • At least one of the structural units a is such that R 1 is a hydrogen atom and a CF force m 2m + l
  • n is a unit derived from a monomer of 2
  • At least one of the structural units b is as follows: R 2 is a hydrogen atom, R 3 force methyl group, R 4 is a hydrogen atom, p is 7, and q is 0
  • At least one of the structural units b is as follows: R 2 is a hydrogen atom, R 3 is a hydrogen atom, R 4 is a hydrogen atom, p is 0, and q is 7.
  • ⁇ 6> A binary or ternary or higher copolymer containing 20 to 60% by mass of the structural unit a and 80 to 40% by mass of the structural unit b.
  • the proportion of the structural unit a is 25 to 60 wt%
  • the proportion of the structural unit b is characterized in that it is a 60 to 40 weight 0/0 Ink composition.
  • ⁇ 8> The content of the fluorine-based surfactant, for ink jet color filter according to ⁇ 2>, which is a 0.05 to 0.15 weight 0/0 of the total weight of the ink composition Ink composition.
  • a colored region is formed by applying the ink composition for an inkjet color filter according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9> to the recesses separated by the dark color separation wall by an inkjet method.
  • ⁇ 13> The above ⁇ 10>, further comprising a first curing step of irradiating at least one colored region formed in the step of forming the colored region with an actinic ray to cure.
  • the deviation is one of the methods for producing a color filter.
  • the method further includes a second curing step in which all the colored regions having a desired hue including red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are cured by heat.
  • R red
  • G green
  • B blue
  • ⁇ 15> A color filter produced by the method for producing a color filter according to any one of ⁇ 10> to ⁇ 14>.
  • a liquid crystal display device comprising the color filter according to ⁇ 15>.
  • Ink composition for ink-jet color filter can be provided which can provide colored pixels.
  • the ink composition for ink-jet color filters of the present invention contains at least a colorant and the following fluorosurfactant according to the present invention.
  • the ink composition of the present invention is used to form a colored region formed by applying droplets to a recess surrounded by a dark color separation wall by an inkjet method.
  • the ink composition of the present invention can be constituted by using a polymerizable compound, a polymerization initiator, a solvent, and other components as required.
  • the ink composition of the present invention provides a surface of a colored region to which droplets have been applied when droplets are applied between dark color separation walls by an inkjet method to form a colored region that constitutes a color filter. It can be formed with good flatness, display non-uniformity, and high-quality image display with display quality.
  • flatness means from the end of the dark color separation wall of the colored region (colored layer that becomes R pixel, G pixel, B pixel, etc.) constituting the color filter. Thickness variation within 10 / zm in the direction parallel to the substrate surface.
  • the fluctuation range is preferably less than 0. This fluctuation range is measured using a stylus type film thickness meter (P10, manufactured by KLA-Tencor Corporation).
  • the ink composition of the present invention can be constituted using a known colorant (dye, pigment).
  • a pigment when a pigment is used, it is desirable that the pigment is uniformly dispersed in the colored liquid composition. Accordingly, the particle diameter of the pigment is preferably 0.1 m or less, particularly preferably 0.08 m or less.
  • Known dyes or pigments include, for example, Victoria 'Pure One Blue BO (CI 425 95), Auramin (CI 41000), Huaz-Black HB (CI 26150), CI Pigment, Yellow 1, CI Pigment 'Yellow 3, CI Pigment''Yellow 12, CI Pigme Yellow, 13, CI pigment 'Yellow 14, CI pigment' Yellow 5, CI pigment 'Yellow 16, CI pigment' Yellow 17, CI pigment 'Yellow 20, CI pigment' Yellow 24, CI pigment 'Yellow 31, CI pigment 'Yellow 55, CI Pigment' Yellow 60, CI Pigment 'Yellow 61, CI Pigment' Yellow 65, CI Pigment 'Yellow 71, CI Pigment' Yellow 73, CI Pigment 'Yellow 74, CI Pigment' Yellow 81, CI Pigment 'Yellow 83, CI Pigment; Yellow 93, CI Pigment' Yellow 95, CI Pigment 'Yellow 3,
  • Pigment 'Yellow 139 CI Pigment' Yellow 150, CI Pigment 'Yellow 1 51, CI Pigment' Yellow 152, CI Pigment 'Yellow 153, CI Pigment-Yellow 154, CI Pigment ⁇ ' Yellow 155, CI Pigment ⁇ 'Yellow 156, CI Pigment' Yellow 166, CI Pigment 'Yellow 168, CI Pigment' Yellow 17 '5, CI Pigment' Yellow 180, CI Pigment 'Yellow 185 ;
  • CI Pigment 'Orange 1 CI Pigment' Orange 5, CI Pigment 'Orange 13, CI Pigment' Orange 14, CI Pigment 'Orange 16, CI Pigment' Orange 17, CI Pigment 'Orange 24, CI Pigment' Orange 34, CI CI Pigment Orange 36, CI Pigment Orange 38, CI Pigment 'Orange 40, CI Pigment ⁇ ' Orange 43, CI Pigment ⁇ Orange 46, CI Pigment ⁇ Orange 49, CI Pigment 'Orange 51, CI Pigment' Orange 61 CI Pigment 'Orange 63, CI Pigment' Orange 64, CI Pigment 'Orange 71, CI Pigment' Orange 73; CI Pigment Noy: GI Pigment No .: LI Pigment No .: Let 19, No. 23 CI Pigment No. 23, CI Pigment Nonot 29, CI Pigment Nonot 32, CI Pigment Nore 36, CI Pigment 38;
  • CI Pigment 'Red 1 CI Pigment' Red 2, CI Pigment 'Red 3, CI Pigment' Red 4, CI Pigment 'Red 5, CI Pigment' Red 6, CI Pigment Red 7, CI Pigment 'Red. 8, CI Pigment 'Red 9, CI Pigment' Let 10, CI Pigment 'Red 11, CI Pigment' Red 12, CI Pigment 'Red 14, CI Pigment' Red 15, CI Pigment 'Red 16, CI Pigment' Red 16 , CI Pigment 'Red 18, CI Pigment' Red 19, CI Pigment 'Red 21, CI Pigment.Red 22, CI Pigment.Red 23, CI Pigment.Red 30, CI Pigment.Red 31, CI Pigment.Red 32 CI Pigment Red 37, CI Pigment Red 38, CI Pigment 'Le , CI Pigment 'Red 41, CI Pigment' Red 42, CI Pigment 'Red 48: 1, CI Pigment' Red 48
  • CI pigment 'Red 25 4 is preferred for the R (red) ink composition
  • CI pigment' green 36 for the G (green) ink composition.
  • Force S is preferred
  • CI pigment 'Blue 15: 6 is preferred in the ink composition of B (Blue).
  • the pigments may be used in combination.
  • the preferred pigment combinations are CI Pigment 'Red 254, CI Pigment Red 177, CI Pigment Red 224, CI Pigment' Yellow 139, or CI Pigment ' In combination with Violet 23, CI Pigment 'Green 36, CI Pigment' Yellow 150, CI Pigment 'Yellow 139, CI Pigment' Yellow 185, CI Pigment 'Yellow 13 8, or CI Pigment' Yellow 180 ' In the CI Pigment 'Blue 15: 6, a combination with CI Pigment' Violet 23 or CI Pigment 'Blu 60 is mentioned.
  • the CI pigment 'Red 254, CI pigment' Dalene 36, or CI pigment 'Blue 15: 6 in the pigment contains the CI pigment' In Red 254, 80% by mass or more is preferable, particularly 90% by mass or more is preferable.
  • the C.I. Pigment 'Green 36 50% by mass or more is preferable, and 60% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the CI pigment 'Blue 15: 6 80% by mass or more is preferable, particularly 90% by mass or more is preferable.
  • the pigment is preferably used as a dispersion.
  • This dispersion can be prepared by adding and dispersing a composition obtained by previously mixing the pigment and the pigment dispersant to a polymerizable compound (or vehicle or solvent) described later.
  • a disperser used when dispersing the pigment.
  • the aider, roll mill, and the like described in “Encyclopedia of Pigments” Asakura Kunizo, 1st edition, Asakura Shoten, 2000, p. 438)
  • Well-known dispersers such as Atrider, Super Mill, Dissolver, Homomixer, and Sand Mill can be used.
  • the material may be finely pulverized using frictional force by mechanical grinding described on page 310 of “Encyclopedia of Pigments”.
  • the particle diameter of the colorant (pigment) is preferably 0.001 to 0.1 ⁇ m in terms of number average particle diameter, and more preferably 0.01 to 0.08 ⁇ m.
  • the number average particle diameter is within the above range, the particle surface energy is lowered, aggregation is suppressed, and pigment dispersion can be performed satisfactorily.
  • the dispersion state can be kept more stable and good contrast can be obtained.
  • Particle size refers to the diameter when particles in an electron micrograph image are represented by a circle having the same area. “Number average particle size” means an average value obtained by calculating the particle size of particles and taking the average of 100 particles.
  • the contrast of the colored region can be improved by reducing the particle size of the dispersed pigment. Reducing the particle size can be achieved by adjusting the dispersion time of the pigment dispersion.
  • the known disperser can be used for the dispersion.
  • the dispersion time is preferably 10 to 30 hours, more preferably 18 to 30 hours, and most preferably 24 to 30 hours.
  • the dispersion time is within the above range, a good contrast with a small pigment particle size can be obtained.
  • an increase in the viscosity of the dispersion can be suppressed, and ink jet head force can be discharged well.
  • the difference in contrast between two or more colored areas is preferably within 600. In order to adjust within 600, it is desirable to adjust the pigment particle size.
  • the contrast of each colored region constituting the color filter is preferably 2000 or more, more preferably 2800 or more, still more preferably 3000 or more, and most preferably 3400 or more. When the contrast is within the above range, an easy-to-see image with a whitish impression can be obtained when an image of a liquid crystal display device including a color filter is observed.
  • the difference in contrast between the colored regions is preferably 600 or less, more preferably 410 or less, still more preferably 350 or less, and most preferably 200 or less. If the difference in contrast is within 600, the amount of light leakage from each colored area at the time of black display does not differ greatly, and the color balance of black display is good.
  • the “contrast of the colored region” means a contrast that is individually evaluated for each color of R, G, and B constituting the color filter. Contrast can be measured as follows. In other words, the brightness of light passing through the other polarizing plate with the backlight applied from the side of one polarizing plate with the polarizing plates overlapped on both sides of the object to be measured and the polarizing directions of the polarizing plates made parallel to each other Measure Y1. Further, with the polarizing plates orthogonal to each other, a backlight is applied from the side of one polarizing plate, and the luminance Y2 of the light passing through the other polarizing plate is measured. Y1ZY2 is calculated using the measured values obtained.
  • the polarizing plate used for contrast measurement is the same as the polarizing plate used for a liquid crystal display device using a color filter.
  • the amount of the colorant in the ink composition is a force that can be appropriately selected in order to obtain a desired hue and density, and is preferably 3.0% by mass or more based on the total mass of the ink composition. More preferably, it is 5.0% by mass or more.
  • the ink composition of the present invention is derived from at least one of structural units a derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (a) and a monomer represented by the following general formula (b) as a fluorine-based surfactant. And at least one copolymer (hereinafter referred to as “surface activity according to the present invention”) having a mass ratio (a / h) of structural unit a to structural unit b of 20Z80 to 60Z40. "Sometimes referred to as an agent").
  • This fluorosurfactant is a fluorine-containing polymer.
  • This fluorosurfactant is an ink surface formed by ink-jetting ink into a recess that is finely partitioned by a dark color separation wall and surrounded by the separation wall. That is, the surface of the colored region can be flattened.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • —CF may be linear or branched! /.
  • m represents an integer of 2 to 14, preferably 4 to 1 m 2m + l
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 18, preferably 2 to 10.
  • Examples of C F include C F, C F, and C F.
  • the proportion of -C F is preferably 20 to 70% by mass with respect to the total mass of the monomer a m 2m + l
  • Particularly preferred is 40 to 60% by mass.
  • R 1 is a hydrogen atom
  • -CF is CF
  • n is 2
  • R 2 and R 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • p and q each independently represent an integer of 0 to 18, and p and q do not represent 0 (zero) at the same time.
  • p and q are preferably 2-8.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms represented by R 4 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
  • a compound in which R 2 is a hydrogen atom, R 3 is a hydrogen atom, R 4 is a hydrogen atom, p is 0, and q is 7. preferable.
  • monomer a contained in one molecule of the surfactant according to the present invention only one type having the same structure may be used, or a plurality of types having different structures may be used. The same applies to monomer b.
  • the weight average molecular weight Mw of the surfactant according to the present invention is preferably 1000 to 40000 force S, more preferably 5 000 to 30000 force! / ⁇ .
  • the surfactant according to the present invention is a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing at least the monomer a and the monomer b, and the ratio of the monomer aZ monomer b in the copolymer is as follows.
  • the (mass ratio) is 20Z80-60Z40.
  • the copolymerization ratio is within the above range, the ink is applied and dried so as to rise above the wall height of the separation wall in the concave portion that is finely divided by the dark separation wall and surrounded by the separation wall.
  • the upper surface of the ink that is, the surface of the colored region to be a colored pixel can be flattened, and this is particularly effective for improving the flatness near the dark color separation wall.
  • the surfactant according to the present invention is also preferably a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing the above-mentioned monomers a and b with other optional monomers.
  • other optional monomers that can be copolymerized in addition to monomers a and b include, for example, styrene, butyltoluene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, 2-methylstyrene, chlorostyrene, butylbenzoic acid, and sodium benzenebenzene sulfonate.
  • Styrene such as aminostyrene and derivatives thereof, substituted products, gens such as butadiene and isoprene, acrylonitrile, butyl ethers, methacrylic acid, acrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, partially esterified maleic acid, Styrene sulfonic anhydride Maleic acid, kain cinnamate, vinyl chloride, vinyl acetate, etc.
  • the surfactant according to the present invention is 100 parts by mass, a copolymer of a binary or ternary or monomer having a force of 20 to 60 parts by mass of monomer a and 80 to 40 parts by mass of monomer b, monomer A ternary or higher copolymer consisting of a20 to 60 parts by mass, monomers b80 to 40 parts by mass, and other optional monomers (remaining mass) is preferred.
  • a binary or ternary or higher copolymer consisting of 25 to 60 parts by weight of monomer a and 60 to 40 parts by weight of monomer b, 25 to 60 parts by weight of monomer a, 60 to 40 parts by weight of monomer b, A ternary or higher copolymer consisting of other optional monomers (remaining mass) is preferred.
  • the surfactant according to the present invention is a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing at least the monomer a and the monomer b, and regular random block copolymerization, for example, block copolymerization is not particularly limited. Even if the graft copolymer is out of alignment! /.
  • surfactant according to the present invention two or more surfactants having different molecular structures and different Z or monomer compositions can be used.
  • the content of the surfactant according to the present invention in the ink composition for an inkjet color filter is preferably 0.01 to 0.2% by mass of the total mass of the ink. % Is more preferable. When the content is within the above range, it is possible to improve the flatness of the pattern surface when an ink jet is applied between the dark color separation walls to form a colored pattern.
  • a radical polymerizable compound that is cured by a polymerization reaction with a radical active species and a cationic polymerizable compound that is cured by a cationic polymerization reaction with a cationic active species can be used.
  • the ink composition of the present invention can be formed into a radical polymerizable composition when the radical polymerizable compound is used.
  • the ink composition of the present invention can be formed into a cationically polymerizable composition when a cationically polymerizable compound is used. Any of these configurations is suitable.
  • radical polymerizable compound examples include, but are not limited to, the following compounds.
  • the radical polymerizable compound includes a monofunctional monomer, a bifunctional or higher monomer, and an oligomer.
  • the monofunctional monomer has one ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
  • Examples of the bifunctional or higher functional monomers and oligomers include ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, diethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, 1, 6 hexanediol di (Meth) acrylate, ethoxylated 1,6 hexanediol ditalate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, ethoxylated neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, propoxylated neopentyl glycol di (meth) attaly , Tripropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol diathalate, 1,4 butanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonandi dialate, tetraethylene glycol dialate —Butyl 2— Thirul 1,3 propanediol ditalylate, dimethylol
  • pentaerythritol triatalylate tetramethylolpropane tritalylate, tetramethylol methane tritalylate, pentaerythritol tetratalylate, force prolatatone modified trimethylolpropane tritalylate, ethoxylated isocyanuric acid triatalylate, tri ( 2-Hydroxyethylisocyanurate) triatareyl, propoxylate glyceryl riatalylate, tetramethylol methane tetraatarylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetraatalylate, ethoxylated pentaerythritol tetraatalylate Hexaatalylate, Neopentyl glycolo Rigoatarylate, 1, 4 Butanediol oligoattaryl D
  • the cationically polymerizable compound is a compound that cures by causing a polymerization reaction by the cationic active species generated from the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Examples of the cationically polymerizable compound include various known cationically polymerizable monomers known as photopower thione polymerizable monomers. For example, JP-A-6-9714, JP-A-2001-31892, 2001-40068, 2001-55507, 2001-310938, 2001-310937, 2001-220526, etc. And bule ether compounds, oxetane compounds, oxsilani compounds and the like.
  • Examples of the cationically polymerizable compound having a bull ether as a functional group include urethane bull ether (bull ether urethane) and ester bull ether. These oligomers can be used alone or in combination.
  • aromatic epoxy resin polyvalent phenol having at least one aromatic ring, or polyglycidyl ether of alkylene oxide-attached product thereof, such as bisphenol A, bisphenol F, Further, glycidyl ether, epoxy novolac resin, bisphenol A novolak diglycidyl ether, bisphenol F novolac diglycidyl ether, and the like, which are further carotenated with alkylene oxide, can be mentioned.
  • polyglycidyl ether of polyhydric alcohol having at least one alicyclic ring or cyclohexene, cyclopentene ring-containing compound is epoxidized with an oxidizing agent.
  • the resulting cyclohexene oxide structure-containing compound, cyclopentene oxide structure-containing compound, or vinyl cyclohexane structure-containing compound obtained by epoxidizing a compound having a vinylcyclohexane structure with an oxidizing agent. Things.
  • aliphatic epoxy resin polyglycidyl ether of aliphatic polyhydric alcohol or its alkylene oxide adduct, polyglycidyl ester of aliphatic long-chain polybasic acid, and aliphatic long-chain unsaturated hydrocarbon are oxidized with an oxidizing agent.
  • examples thereof include epoxy-containing compounds, glycidyl acrylate or homopolymer of glycidyl methacrylate, copolymers of glycidyl acrylate or glycidyl methacrylate.
  • Representative compounds include 1,4 butanediol diglycidyl ether, 1,6 hexanediol diglycidyl ether, glycerin triglycidyl ether, trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether, pentaerythritol tetraglycidyl ether, sorbitol tetraglyceride.
  • Polyglycol glycidyl ethers such as glycidyl ether, dipentaerythritol hexaglycidyl ether, polyethylene glycolanol diglycidinole ether, polypropylene glycolanol diglycidyl ether, and aliphatics such as propylene glycol and glycerin
  • aliphatic Monoglycidyl ethers of higher alcohols phenol, cresol, butylphenol, polyether alcohol monoglycidyl ethers obtained by adding alkylene oxides to these, glycidyl esters of higher fatty acids, epoxy soybean oil, epoxy stagyl stearate, epoxy Examples thereof include butyl stearate and epoxidized rubber oil.
  • the amount of the polymerizable compound in the ink composition is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 60% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the ink composition.
  • the curability can be satisfied with the intensity of a general active energy ray, and it is not necessary to lengthen the irradiation time.
  • the polymerization initiator used in the present invention generates radically active species upon irradiation with active energy rays, and generates a radical polymerization initiator that initiates polymerization of a radical polymerizable compound, and a cationically active species. Any cationic polymerization initiator that initiates polymerization of the cationic polymerizable compound can be used in accordance with the polymerizable compound.
  • radical polymerization initiator examples include the following.
  • the benzophenone series includes benzophenone, benzoylbenzoic acid, 4-phenol-penzophenone, 4,4-jetylaminobenzophenone, 3,3'-dimethyl-4-methoxybenzophenone, 4-benzoyl 4'-methyldiphen- Rusulfide etc. are mentioned.
  • thixanthone examples include thixanthone, 2 chloroxanthone, 2, 4 jetylthioxanthone, 1 chloro-4 propoxythixanthone, isopropyl xanthone, and the like.
  • acetophenone system 2-methyl-1-mono (4-methylthio) phenol- 2-morpholinopropane 1-one, 2-benzyl-1-2-dimethylamino-1-(4-morpholinophenol) -butanone 1, 2 —Hydroxy-2-methyl 1-phenolpropane 1-one, 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone, 2,2-dimethyl-2-hydroxyacetophenone, 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone, 4 -Phenoxydichloroacetophenone, diethylacetophenone, 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenol ketone and the like.
  • benzoin series benzoin methyl ether, benzoin isobutyl ether, benzine And rumethyl ketal.
  • acylphosphine oxide examples include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyldiphenylphosphine oxide, bis (2,4,6 trimethylbenzoyl) acylphosphine oxide, and the like.
  • a diazonium salt, an iodine salt, a sulfonium salt, an iron arene complex, and an organic polyhalogen compound are preferable.
  • diazo-um salt, monodonium salt, and sulfo-um salt are JP-B 54-14277, JP-B 54-14278, JP-A 51-56885, US Pat. 70, 296 specification, 3,853, 002 specification etc. are mentioned.
  • Examples of the light-power thione polymerization initiator include aromatic diazo-um salt, aromatic sulfo-um salt, aromatic ododonium salt, meta-oxycene compound, and key compound Z aluminum complex. It is done.
  • the amount of the polymerization initiator in the ink composition is preferably 5 to 60% by mass, more preferably 10 to 50% by mass with respect to the polymerizable compound (mass).
  • the curability can be satisfied with the intensity of a general active energy ray, and it is not necessary to lengthen the irradiation time.
  • the ink composition of the present invention can be constituted using a solvent in addition to the above components.
  • a solvent When a solvent is contained, an appropriate fluidity can be imparted for droplet ejection by the ink jet method, and it is effective for the formation of flatness by the surfactant according to the present invention described above.
  • the amount of the solvent can be appropriately selected within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention.
  • the solvent in the present invention assists the dissolution or dispersion of functional materials such as a colorant, a polymerizable monomer, an additive, and a polymer contained in the ink composition of the present invention.
  • This solvent functions to enhance the fluidity of the ink composition of the present invention to facilitate droplet ejection and the like, and after droplet ejection of the ink composition and predetermined drying or heat treatment, Most of them (approximately 90% or more) have properties that are removed by 1S evaporation.
  • the polymerizable monomer is also in a liquid state, but when the solvent is added thereto, the fluidity is further increased and droplet ejection is facilitated.
  • the solvent an organic solvent having a boiling point of 100 ° C or lower is usually used.
  • Ink dry For the purpose of preventing dryness and clogging of the head, a high boiling point solvent having a boiling point of 200 ° C or lower, and sometimes higher, is used.
  • solvent examples include those described in "New Edition Solvent Pocket Book” (edited by Organic Synthetic Science Association, published by Ohm) and “Solvent Handbook” (edited by Shozo Asahara et al., Kodansha, 1976).
  • ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate; diethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers such as diethylene glycol monomethylol ether, diethylene glycol monomethenole etherenole; diethylene glycol Diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as mono-n-butyl ether acetate; Propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as propylene glycol noremonomethinoatenoreacetate and propyleneglycolenoethylenoleatenoreacetate; diethylene glycol dimethyl ether
  • Other ethers such as: cyclohexanone, 2 heptanone, 3 heptanone, methyl ethyl keto , Ketones such as methyl isobutyl ketone and acetone; lactic acid alkyl esters such as 2-hydroxypropionate ethyl
  • the ink composition for an inkjet color filter of the present invention preferably has a solid content of 15% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • the solid content is a component other than the solvent, and the solvent is as described above.
  • the ink composition for an inkjet color filter of the present invention preferably has a viscosity of 2 to 30 mPa's, more preferably 5 to 20111? & '5, and a surface tension of 10 to 50 dyneZ cm. 20-40 dyneZcm is more preferable.
  • the color filter according to the present invention includes, on a substrate, a pixel group of two or more colors having different hues and a light-shielding dark color separation wall that separates the pixels constituting the pixel group from each other. is there.
  • This color filter is configured by forming a pixel pattern by providing a colored region (colored layer) by a inkjet method in a recess surrounded by a dark color separation wall.
  • the method for producing a color filter of the present invention includes the above-described ink composition for an ink-jet color filter according to the present invention applied to the concave portions partitioned and separated by a dark color separation wall by an ink-jet method. (Hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “colored region forming step”).
  • the method for producing a color filter of the present invention preferably further comprises a curing step in which at least one colored region formed is cured by irradiation with actinic rays, or after all colored regions having a desired hue are formed. It has a hardening process which hardens by.
  • the color filter manufacturing method of the present invention can be configured by providing other processes such as a beta process and an ink repellent process as needed.
  • the dark color separation wall is formed on the substrate in advance before the colored region forming step, and details of the method of forming the dark color separation wall will be described later.
  • the colored region forming step includes an inkjet color filter ink containing a colorant (including R, G, or B) together with the surfactant according to the present invention in the recesses between the dark color separation walls as described above.
  • a droplet of the composition is applied by an inkjet method to form a colored region.
  • This colored region is a color pixel of red (R), green (G), blue (B), etc. constituting the color filter.
  • the colored region is formed by a coloring liquid for forming colored pixels (for example, RGB three-color pixel pattern) in the recesses surrounded by the dark color separation wall formed on the substrate as described above.
  • a coloring liquid for forming colored pixels for example, RGB three-color pixel pattern
  • the ink composition for an inkjet color filter of the present invention can be penetrated to form a plurality of pixels of two or more colors.
  • Inkjet methods are known such as a method of thermally curing ink, a method of photocuring ink, and a method of ejecting ink after forming a transparent image-receiving layer on a substrate in advance. This method can be used.
  • the discharge amount discharged to the recess surrounded by the dark color separation wall can be appropriately selected in order to obtain a desired hue and density.
  • the size of one droplet is preferably 0.1 to 100 pl (picoliter), more preferably 1 to 50 pl.
  • the shape of the color filter pattern is not particularly limited, and may be a general stripe shape as a black matrix shape, a lattice shape, or a delta arrangement.
  • an ink jet method a method in which charged ink is continuously ejected and controlled by an electric field, a method in which ink is ejected intermittently using a piezoelectric element, and an ink is heated and intermittently utilized by using its foaming.
  • Various methods such as a spraying method can be adopted.
  • the ink is heated to 40 to 70 ° C to lower the ink viscosity. Since the colored liquid composition is generally higher in viscosity than the water-based ink, the viscosity fluctuation range due to temperature fluctuation is large. It is important to keep the ink temperature as constant as possible because viscosity fluctuations directly affect the droplet size and droplet ejection speed, and easily cause image quality degradation.
  • the thermal head As the ink jet head (hereinafter also simply referred to as a head), a known one can be applied, and a continuous type or a dot on demand type can be used.
  • the thermal head is preferably a type having an operating valve as described in JP-A-9323420 for discharging.
  • the piezo head for example, the heads described in European Patent A277, 703, European Patent A278, 590, etc. can be used.
  • the head should have a temperature control function so that the ink temperature can be controlled.
  • the driving frequency is preferably 1 to 500 kHz.
  • the color filter according to the present invention preferably has a configuration constituted by a group of three colored regions (colored layers) by spraying RGB three colors of ink.
  • a step (first curing step) in which at least one colored region formed in the colored region forming step is cured by irradiation with an actinic ray can be provided.
  • red A cured colored region can be formed by curing the curable ink of the present invention of each color including color (R), green (G), and blue (B). Curing may be performed every time a colored region of one color is formed, or may be performed after forming colored regions of a plurality of colors.
  • Curing of the curable ink according to the present invention involves an exposure process that promotes polymerization and curing using an energy source that emits active energy rays in a wavelength region corresponding to the photosensitive wavelength of the ink. It can be done by applying.
  • Examples of the energy source include ultraviolet rays of 400 to 200 nm, far ultraviolet rays, g-line, h-line, i-line, KrF excimer laser beam, ArF excimer laser beam, electron beam, X-ray, molecular beam, or ion.
  • a beam, such as a beam, to which the above-described polymerization initiator is sensitive can be appropriately selected and used.
  • Preferred light sources include LEDs, high pressure mercury lamps, and metal halide lamps.
  • the irradiation time of the active energy ray can be appropriately set according to the combination of the polymerizable compound and the polymerization initiator. For example, when exposure is performed at an illuminance of 20 mWZcm 2 , 1 to 750 Can be seconds.
  • a step (second curing step) of curing all the colored regions of a desired hue including red (R), green (G), and blue (B) by heat can be provided.
  • R red
  • G green
  • B blue
  • a colored region having a desired hue and a dark color separation wall are formed, and after performing the first curing step, a heat treatment (so-called beta treatment) is further performed to cure by heat.
  • a heat treatment so-called beta treatment
  • a substrate on which a colored region photopolymerized by light irradiation and a dark color separation wall are formed is heated in an electric furnace, a dryer, or an infrared lamp is irradiated. Shoot and heat.
  • the length of one side of the pixel is preferably 50 to 300 / ⁇ ⁇ . Particularly preferred is 111 to 100-300 m. Further, it may be a stripe shape in which pixels of the same color are arranged in a vertical shape.
  • the heating temperature and heating time at this time depend on the composition of the colored liquid composition and the thickness of the colored region. In general, from the viewpoint of ensuring sufficient solvent resistance, alkali resistance, and ultraviolet absorbance, the heating temperature and heating time are preferably about 120 ° C. to about 250 ° C. for about 10 minutes to about 120 minutes.
  • the surface roughness (Ra value) of the colored region (colored layer) formed by applying the ink composition for an inkjet color filter of the present invention to an inkjet is preferably 5 nm or less, more preferably. 4 nm or less. This Ra value is measured by a contact film thickness meter (a stylus type surface roughness meter P10 manufactured by Tencor).
  • a partition wall forming step for forming a dark color separation wall can be provided, and this partition wall forming step is performed using a dark color composition. Form a wall.
  • the dark color composition is preferably a composition having a high optical density, and the preferred optical density is 2.0 to 2.0 when a photosensitive resin composition layer having a thickness equivalent to a dark color separation wall is formed. 10.
  • Optical density at 0. The more preferable optical density is 2.5 to 6.0, and particularly preferably 3.0 to 5.0.
  • the optical density with respect to the exposure wavelength generally the ultraviolet region
  • the optical density value is preferably 2.0 to 10.0 force S, more preferably 2.5 to 6.0, and most preferably 3.0 to 5.0.
  • the polymerization and curing becomes good, and a dark color separation wall having a desired shape can be formed.
  • the dark color property can be imparted by using various coloring materials such as dyes and pigments described later, carbon in various forms, or materials having a combination of these, and black is the most common.
  • the dark color composition is composed of at least a colorant, a polymerization initiation system, and a polymerizable compound.
  • a polymerization initiation system a thermal initiation system using a thermal initiator and a photoinitiation system using a photoinitiator are generally mentioned, but it is preferable to be composed of a photoinitiation system.
  • the formation of the dark color separation wall constituting the color filter in the present invention is performed, for example, on at least one of the substrates before the colored region forming step and the curing step described above are performed.
  • a photosensitive resin layer is formed using the dark color composition, and the formed photosensitive resin layer can be suitably exposed by patterning (preferably under poor oxygen conditions) and developing.
  • the dark color separation wall is a partition wall pattern that separates colored areas formed by ejecting droplets of the curable ink (colored liquid composition) of the present invention by an ink jet method. .
  • other steps such as a beta treatment or an ink repellent treatment can be provided as necessary.
  • the photosensitive resin layer can be constituted by using a dark color composition containing a coloring material, a polymerizable compound, and a photoinitiating system, and if necessary, further a binder, a known additive such as a plasticizer, Other components such as a filler, a stabilizer, a polymerization inhibitor, a surfactant, a solvent, and an adhesion promoter can be used.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is a method of applying a dark color composition (for example, containing at least a polymerizable monomer, a photopolymerization initiator, a binder, and a coloring material) onto a substrate (preferably a dark color composition). Or a method of transferring a photosensitive resin layer onto a substrate using a photosensitive transfer material having a photosensitive resin layer using a dark color composition (transfer method). Can do. Details of the dark color composition and the photosensitive transfer material will be described later.
  • a dark color composition for example, containing at least a polymerizable monomer, a photopolymerization initiator, a binder, and a coloring material
  • the coating is preferably performed using a slit-shaped nozzle or slit coater having a slit-shaped hole in a portion for discharging the liquid.
  • a slit coater can be suitably used.
  • a spinner of all Howaira one to " ⁇ the mouth 1 ⁇ "' ⁇ "co-1 to"data' ⁇ " ⁇ force.
  • a step of coating and forming a photosensitive resin layer using a dark color composition on a substrate is provided, and as described later, the coated and coated photosensitive resin layer [preferably Is exposed to an oxygen condition (for example, an oxygen barrier layer is further formed on the photosensitive resin layer and formed through the oxygen barrier layer, or an inert gas atmosphere or a reduced pressure condition). By darkening, a dark color separation wall is formed.
  • the oxygen blocking layer can be formed in the same manner as the oxygen blocking layer in the photosensitive transfer material described later.
  • a photosensitive transfer material described later is used, and the photosensitive resin layer formed in a film shape on the temporary support is pressure-bonded with a roller or a flat plate heated and Z or pressed on the substrate surface.
  • pasting by thermocompression bonding laminate
  • leaving the temporary support under anoxic conditions
  • remove the photosensitive resin layer or further remove the temporary support to remove the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer that has been transferred and transferred is exposed (preferably under poor oxygen conditions (for example, through an oxygen barrier layer provided on the photosensitive resin layer)), developed, and patterned.
  • a deep color separation wall is formed by Jung. Details of exposure and development will be described later.
  • the laminating can be performed by a laminator and a laminating method described in JP-A-7-110575, JP-A-11-77942, JP-A-2000-334836, and JP-A-2002-148794.
  • the Details regarding the photosensitive transfer material and transfer by a transfer method will be described later.
  • the layer thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is not particularly limited and depends on the solid content of the dark color composition and the height of the dark color separation wall to be formed. ⁇ : LO / zm is preferred 1.8-8. Force is more preferred, 2. 2-5.0 m force ⁇ More preferred! / ,.
  • the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition for forming the dark color separation wall contains at least one polymerizable compound. It can be cured by the action of active species from the photoinitiating system described later to form noturn.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound include monofunctional or polyfunctional monomers, and polyfunctional monomers are preferred.
  • the polyfunctional monomer is a polymerizable monomer having two or more polymerizable groups, and can be used alone or in combination with other monomers.
  • the monofunctional or polyfunctional monomer include t-butyl (meth) acrylate, ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, triethylene glycol.
  • reaction products with diisocyanates such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, toluene diisocyanate, and xylene diisocyanate.
  • pentaerythritol tetraatalylate dipentaerythritol hexaatalylate, dipentaerythritol pentaatalylate, and tris (2-acryloyloxychetyl) isocyanurate are particularly preferable.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition is preferably 5 to 80% by mass with respect to the total solid content (mass) of the layer or composition. -70% by weight is particularly preferred. When the content is within the above range, it is effective to ensure the resistance to the alkali developer after photocuring. [0113]
  • the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition for forming the dark color separation wall contains at least one photoinitiating system.
  • the photoinitiating system is a compound that generates an active species that initiates polymerization of the polymerizable compound upon irradiation (also referred to as exposure) of radiation such as visible light, ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, electron beam, or X-ray. It can select suitably from these compounds.
  • torino, romethyl group-containing compounds for example, atalidine compounds, acetophenone compounds, bisimidazole compounds, triazine compounds, benzoin compounds, benzophenone compounds, ⁇ -diketone compounds, polynuclear quinone compounds Compounds, xanthone compounds, diazo compounds, and the like.
  • a trihalomethyl group-containing compound in which at least one selected from trino, romethyl group-containing compounds, atalidine compounds, acetophenone compounds, bisimidazole compounds, and triazine compounds is preferred And at least one selected from the atalidine-based compounds is particularly preferred.
  • Torino, romethyl group-containing compounds, and atalidine compounds are also useful because they are versatile and inexpensive.
  • the trihalomethyl group-containing compound is particularly preferably 2 trichloromethyl.
  • the polymerization initiation system (particularly the photoinitiation system) may be used in combination of two or more in addition to being used alone.
  • the total amount in the photosensitive resin layer or dark color composition of the polymerization initiation system is 0.1 to 20% by mass relative to the total solid content (mass) of the layer or composition. Preferred is 0.5 to 10% by mass.
  • the curing efficiency is high and the curing can be performed in a short time, and the image pattern formed at the time of development is not lost or the pattern surface is not rough.
  • the photoinitiating system may be configured with a hydrogen donor.
  • the hydrogen donor is preferably a mercabtan compound or an amine compound as defined below from the viewpoint that sensitivity can be further improved.
  • the “hydrogen donor” refers to a compound that can donate a hydrogen atom to a radical generated from the photopolymerization initiator by exposure.
  • the mercabtan compound has a benzene ring or a heterocyclic ring as a mother nucleus, and has one or more, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 to 2, mercapto groups directly bonded to the mother nucleus. (Hereinafter, referred to as “mercabbutane-based hydrogen donor”).
  • the amine compound has a benzene ring or a heterocyclic ring as a mother nucleus, and is directly connected to the mother nucleus. It is a compound having 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 to 2 amino groups bonded to each other (hereinafter referred to as “aminic hydrogen donor”).
  • the hydrogen donor may have a mercapto group and an amino group at the same time.
  • mercaptan-based hydrogen donor examples include 2 mercaptobenzozoazole, 2 mercaptobenzoxazole, 2 mercaptobenzozoimidazole, 2, 5 dimercapto 1, 3, 4-thiadiazole, 2 mercapto 2 , 5 dimethylaminopyridine, and the like.
  • 2-mercaptobenzothiazole and 2-mercaptobenzoxazole are preferable, and 2-mercaptobenzothiazole is particularly preferable! /.
  • amine-based hydrogen donor examples include 4, 4 'bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone, 4, 4'-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone, 4-jetylaminoacetophenone, 4- Examples include dimethylaminopropiophenone, ethyl 4-dimethylaminobenzoate, 4-dimethylaminobenzoic acid, 4-dimethylaminobenzozotolyl and the like. Of these, 4,4′-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone and 4,4′-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone are preferable, and 4,4′-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone is particularly preferable.
  • the hydrogen donors can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • a hydrogen donor is one or more mercabtan hydrogen donors and one or more amine hydrogen donors because the formed image is less likely to fall off the substrate during development and can also improve strength and sensitivity. It is preferred to use in combination with the body.
  • Specific examples of the combination of the mercabtan based hydrogen donor and the amine based hydrogen donor include 2 mercaptobenzothiazole Z4, 4'-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole Z4, 4'-bis (Jetylamino) benzophenone, 2 mercaptobenzoxazole Z4,4'-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone, 2mercaptobenzoxazole Z4,4'-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone, and the like.
  • a more preferred combination is 2 mercaptobenzothiazole / 4,4'-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone, 2mercaptobenzoxazole Z4,4'-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone, and a particularly preferred combination is 2-mercaptobenzozothiazole / 4, 4 'Bis (jetylamino) benzophenone.
  • the mass ratio (M: A) of the butane-based hydrogen donor (M) to the amine-based hydrogen donor (A) is usually preferably 1: 1 to 1: 4, more preferably 1: 1 to 1: 3. .
  • the total amount of the hydrogen donor in the photosensitive resin layer or dark composition is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass relative to the total solid content (mass) of the layer or composition.
  • 5-: LO mass% is particularly preferred.
  • the photosensitive resin layer or dark color composition for forming a dark color separation wall preferably contains at least one colorant. By containing a color material, a visible image having a desired color can be formed.
  • Examples of the color material include pigments and dyes described in paragraphs [0038] to [0054] of JP-A-2005-17716, and paragraphs [0068] to [0072] of JP-A-2004-361447. And the colorants described in paragraph numbers [0080] to [0088] of JP-A-2005-17521 can be suitably used.
  • organic pigments, inorganic pigments, dyes, and the like are suitable as the color material.
  • metal oxide powder such as carbon black, titanium carbon, titanium oxide, iron tetroxide, metal sulfide powder
  • a light-shielding agent such as metal powder
  • a mixture of pigments such as red, blue, and green
  • Known colorants dyes, pigments
  • black color materials include carbon black, titanium carbon, iron oxide, titanium oxide, graphite, and the like.
  • the pigment is uniformly dispersed in the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition.
  • the content of the coloring material in the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition is 30 to 70% by mass in terms of shortening the development time with respect to the solid content (mass) of the layer or composition. 40-60% by mass is more preferable 50-55% by mass is more preferable.
  • the pigment is desirably used as a dispersion.
  • This dispersion can be prepared by adding and dispersing a composition obtained by previously mixing the pigment and the pigment dispersant in an organic solvent (or vehicle) described later.
  • the vehicle is a paint liquid.
  • the part of the medium in which the pigment is dispersed when in the body state is a liquid part that binds to the above-mentioned pigment and hardens the coating film (binder), and a component that dissolves and dilutes this (organic solvent) ).
  • disperser used when dispersing the pigment examples include, but are not particularly limited to, a kneader described in “Encyclopedia of Pigments” (Asakura Kunizo, 1st edition, page 438, Asakura Shoten (2000)).
  • Well-known dispersers such as Ronore Lenore, Atridor, Super Minore, Dizonoleno, Homomixer, Sand Mill and the like can be mentioned. Further, it may be finely pulverized by using frictional force by mechanical grinding described on page 310 of “Encyclopedia of Pigments”.
  • the number average particle diameter of the coloring material is 0.001 to 0.1111, preferably 0.01 to 0.08 / zm. Better than power! / ⁇ .
  • the “particle diameter” refers to the diameter when the particles are represented by a circle having the same area as the area of the particles in the electron micrograph. “Number average particle size” means an average value of 100 particles of a plurality of particles.
  • the photosensitive resin layer or dark color composition for forming a dark color separation image wall can be constituted using at least one binder.
  • a polymer having a polar group such as a carboxylic acid group or a carboxylic acid group in the side chain is preferable.
  • a polymer having a polar group such as a carboxylic acid group or a carboxylic acid group in the side chain
  • examples thereof include JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12577, JP-B-54-25957, JP-A-59-53836, and As described in JP-A-59-71048, methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, partial ester oxalic maleic acid copolymer And the like.
  • cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain may also be mentioned.
  • cyclic acid anhydride to the polymer which has a hydroxyl group can also be used preferably.
  • Particularly preferred examples include copolymers of benzyl (meth) atalylate and (meth) acrylic acid described in US Pat. No. 4,139,391, benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylate, and other Mention may be made of multicomponent copolymers with monomers.
  • These binders having a polar group may be used singly or may be used in the state of a composition used in combination with an ordinary film-forming polymer!
  • the content of the binder in the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition includes a layer or a set. 20 to 50% by mass is preferable with respect to the total solid content (mass) of the composition, and 25 to 45% by mass is more preferable.
  • the dark color composition used for producing the dark color separation wall in the present invention can be constituted using an organic solvent in addition to the above components.
  • the organic solvent include methyl ethinoleketone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, cyclohexanone, cyclohexanol, methyl isobutyl ketone, ethyl lactate, methyl lactate, and strength prolatatum.
  • the dark color composition or photosensitive resin layer in the present invention the following components, for example, surfactant, ultraviolet absorber, and known additives such as plasticizer, filler, stabilizer, thermal polymerization prevention An agent, a solvent, an adhesion promoter and the like can be contained.
  • the dark color composition is a thermoplastic which preferably becomes soft or tacky at a temperature of at least 150 ° C. From this point of view, it can be modified by adding a compatible plasticizer.
  • a uniform film thickness can be controlled by including a surfactant in the dark color composition. Cloth unevenness can be effectively prevented.
  • Preferred examples of the surfactant include surfactants described in JP-A No. 2003-337742 and JP-A No. 11-133600.
  • the content of the surfactant in the dark color composition is generally 0.001 to 1% by mass with respect to the total solid content (mass) of the composition, and 0.01 to 0. 5% by mass is preferred 0.03 to 0.3% by mass is particularly preferred.
  • the dark color composition may contain an ultraviolet absorber as necessary.
  • the ultraviolet absorber include compounds described in JP-A-5-72724, and compounds such as salicylate, benzophenone, benzotriazole, cyanoacrylate, nickel chelate, and hindered amine.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber with respect to the total solid content of the dark color composition is generally 0.5 to 15% by mass, and preferably 1 to 12% by mass. ⁇ 10 mass% is particularly preferred.
  • the dark composition preferably contains a thermal polymerization inhibitor.
  • thermal polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, hydroquinone monomethyl ether, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl- ⁇ -cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butyl Phenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl 6t-butylphenol), 2 mercaptobenzimidazole, phenothiazine and the like.
  • the content relative to the total solids in the dark composition 0.
  • the dark color composition may contain "adhesion aid" described in JP-A-11-133600, other additives, and the like.
  • Adhesion aid described in JP-A-11-133600, other additives, and the like.
  • the photosensitive transfer material is formed by providing a photosensitive resin layer composed of at least the dark color composition on a temporary support, preferably an oxygen barrier layer and a photosensitive layer on the temporary support side. What was provided and provided with the characteristic rosin layer can be used.
  • a material having an oxygen blocking layer provided on the photosensitive resin layer is used, the photosensitive resin layer made of the dark color composition is protected by the oxygen blocking layer in the atmosphere. It automatically becomes an anoxic condition. Therefore, there is an advantage that the current process which does not need to be performed under an inert gas or under reduced pressure can be used as it is. It is also effective in that a dark color separation wall can be formed easily and at low cost.
  • the photosensitive transfer material can be further provided with a thermoplastic resin layer, a protective film or the like, if necessary.
  • the temporary support can be appropriately selected from those that are chemically and thermally stable and made of a flexible material.
  • a thin sheet or film such as Teflon (registered trademark), polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyester, or a laminate thereof is preferable.
  • Teflon registered trademark
  • polyethylene terephthalate polycarbonate
  • polyethylene polypropylene
  • polyester or a laminate thereof
  • biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferred.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is suitably 5 to 300 ⁇ m, preferably 20 to 150 ⁇ m. When the thickness is within the above range, it is possible to avoid tearing at the time of peeling of the temporary support, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in resolution when exposed through the temporary support.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is composed of the above-described dark-colored composition, and is similar to the layer formed by the above-described coating method in terms of properties such as shape and formation method.
  • the aspect is also the same.
  • the oxygen barrier layer is 2000cmV (m 2- dayatm) or less, and the oxygen permeability is preferably 100 cm 3 Z (m 2 ⁇ day • atm) or less, more preferably 50 cm 3 Z (m 2 ⁇ dayatm) or less. LV preferred. If the oxygen permeability is higher than 2000 cm 3 Z (m 2 ⁇ day ⁇ atm), oxygen may not be effectively cut off and a dark color separation wall having a desired shape may not be obtained.
  • the resin material for forming the oxygen barrier layer the polybutyl ether Z maleic anhydride polymer described in JP-A-46-2121 and JP-B-56-40824 , Water-soluble salts of carboxyalkyl cellulose, water-soluble cellulose ethers, water-soluble salts of carboxyalkyl starch, polybutyl alcohol, polybulur pyrrolidone, various polyacrylamides, various water-soluble polyamides, water-soluble salts of polyacrylic acid , Gelatin, ethylene oxide polymers, water-soluble salts of the group consisting of various starches and the like, copolymers of styrene Z maleic acid, maleate resin, and combinations of two or more thereof.
  • the polybutyl ether Z maleic anhydride polymer described in JP-A-46-2121 and JP-B-56-40824 Water-soluble salts of carboxyalkyl cellulose, water-soluble cellulose ethers, water-soluble salts of carboxyalkyl starch, polybuty
  • the oxygen barrier layer a layer mainly composed of polyethylene, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl alcohol (PV A), etc. (especially PVA as a main component) is preferred.
  • PVA having an oxidation rate of 80% or more is preferable.
  • the content of polyvinylpyrrolidone is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass, more preferably 1 to 75% by mass of the total solid content of the oxygen barrier layer.
  • the content of PVA in the oxygen barrier layer is particularly preferably 50 to 80% by mass, more preferably 50 to 90% by mass, and more preferably 50 to 90% by mass.
  • the amount of the above-mentioned resin material added is 1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 10 to 35% by mass, based on the entire layer. If the amount of polyvinyl pyrrolidone added is too large, oxygen barrier properties may be insufficient.
  • thermoplastic resin layer can be provided between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin layer as required. Providing a thermoplastic resin layer is effective in improving the adhesion to the substrate on which the dark color separation wall is formed.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer should contain at least a resin component and be alkali-soluble. Is preferred.
  • a thermoplastic resin that is alkali-soluble and has a substantially soft softness point of 80 ° C or less is preferable.
  • alkali-soluble thermoplastic resins having a soft softness point of 80 ° C or lower examples include saponified products of ethylene and acrylate copolymers, and saponified products of styrene and (meth) acrylate copolymers. , Kento compound of butyltoluene and (meth) acrylic acid ester copolymer, poly (meth) acrylic acid ester, (meth) acrylic acid ester copolymer such as (meth) acrylic acid butyl and vinyl acetate Keny's food, etc.
  • an organic polymer substance having a soft spot of 80 ° C or higher can be substantially added by adding various plasticizers compatible with the polymer substance to the organic polymer substance.
  • the soft saddle point can be lowered to 80 ° C or lower.
  • organic polymer substances include various polymers, supercooled substances, and adhesion improvers within the range where the effective soft spot does not exceed 80 ° C for the purpose of adjusting the adhesive strength with the temporary support.
  • a surfactant, a release agent, etc. can be added.
  • preferable plasticizers include polypropylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, dioctyl phthalate, diheptino phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, cresyl diphosphate, biphenyl diphosphate. it can.
  • a protective film is preferably provided on the surface of the photosensitive resin layer formed on the temporary support in order to protect it from contamination and damage during storage. It is important that the protective film can be easily separated from the photosensitive resin layer force in that it can be made of the same or similar material as that of the temporary support and can perform transfer well.
  • the photosensitive transfer material can be produced, for example, as follows.
  • a thermoplastic resin layer is provided by applying a coating solution (thermoplastic resin layer coating solution) in which the components of the thermoplastic resin layer are dissolved on a temporary support and drying.
  • a solution using a solvent that does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer is applied and dried to laminate an intermediate layer.
  • a dark color composition prepared as described above is further applied onto the intermediate layer using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer, and dried to laminate a photosensitive resin layer.
  • the coating is preferably performed using a coating device (slit coater) using a slit-like nozzle that can be applied by the known coating method described above.
  • a coating device slit coater
  • the photosensitive transfer material is prepared by preparing a sheet provided with a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate layer on a temporary support, and a sheet provided with a photosensitive resin layer on a protective film.
  • the oxygen blocking layer and the photosensitive resin layer can be bonded to each other, and the sheet having the thermoplastic resin layer on the temporary support and the photosensitive film on the protective film can be used.
  • a sheet having a resin layer and an intermediate layer is prepared, and the sheet is bonded so that the thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other.
  • the substrate include a metal base material, a base material bonded with metal, glass, ceramic, a synthetic resin film, and the like. Preferred are those that are transparent and have good dimensional stability, especially glass and synthetic resin films.
  • Exposure of the photosensitive resin layer formed as described above can be performed by irradiating the photosensitive resin layer with light through a mask using a mask provided with a desired pattern.
  • the exposure is preferably performed under an anoxic condition.
  • a layer capable of blocking oxygen for example, an oxygen blocking layer or a temporary support left without being removed at the time of exposure when a photosensitive transfer material is used
  • an inert gas atmosphere or a reduced-pressure atmosphere is preferably performed under an anoxic condition formed by adjusting to an inert gas atmosphere or a reduced pressure atmosphere.
  • Hypoxic conditions include an inert gas atmosphere, a reduced pressure, and a layer that can block oxygen.
  • the inert gas is a general gas such as N, H, or CO, or a rare gas such as He, Ne, or Ar.
  • N is preferable in terms of safety, availability, and cost.
  • the reduced pressure refers to a state of 500 hPa or less, preferably lOOhPa or less.
  • the oxygen blocking layer in the above-described photosensitive transfer material and various films can be applied, for example, polyesters including polyethylene terephthalate (PET), nylon and the like. Also suitable are polyamides and ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers (EVAs). These films may be stretched as necessary, and the thickness is suitably 5 to 300 ⁇ m, preferably 20 to 150 ⁇ m.
  • the hypoxic condition is formed by placing the temporary support and Z or oxygen barrier on the photosensitive resin layer. .
  • a proximity type exposure machine for example, manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Electronics Engineering Co., Ltd.
  • an ultra high pressure mercury lamp can be used.
  • the light source include medium to ultra high pressure mercury lamps, xenon lamps, metal halide lamps, and the like.
  • the [0163] intensity preferably at 300MWZcm 2 or more, particularly preferably 2, OOOmW / cm 2 or more.
  • the upper limit value of illuminance can be increased to a desired illuminance unless there is a particular problem in apparatus and equipment.
  • This illuminance can be adjusted to the above range by methods such as increasing the output of the light source, increasing the number of light sources, and reducing the distance between the light source and the object to be exposed.
  • a developing process is performed using a developer to form a pattern image on the photosensitive resin layer. Thereafter, a water washing process is performed as necessary.
  • a dilute aqueous solution of an alkaline substance is preferably used as the developer used in the development processing, but it may be a solution obtained by adding a small amount of an organic solvent miscible with water.
  • alkaline substance examples include alkali metal hydroxides (for example, sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide), alkali metal carbonates (for example, sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate), Lucari metal bicarbonates (eg, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate), alkali metal silicates (eg, sodium silicate, potassium silicate), alkali metal metasilicates (eg, sodium metasilicate, metasilicate) Potassium), triethanolamine, jetanolamine, monoethanolamine, morpholine, tetraalkylammonium hydroxides (eg, tetramethylammonium hydroxide), trisodium phosphate, and the like.
  • the concentration of alkaline substances is preferably 0.01 to 30% by mass.
  • the pH is preferably 8 to 14.
  • water-miscible organic solvent examples include, for example, methanol, ethanol, 2-prononole, 1-propanol, butanol, diacetone-ethanolo, ethyleneglycol-no monomethinoatenore, Ethylene glycol-monoethylenoleatenole, ethylene glycol-monomonone n butyl ether, benzyl alcohol, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, ⁇ — force prolataton, ⁇ -butyrolataton, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, hexamethylphospho
  • Preferable examples include luamide, ethyl acetate, methyl lactate, ⁇ -strength prolatatam, and ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ -methylpyrrolidone.
  • concentration of the organic solvent miscible with water is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass.
  • the concentration of the surfactant to which a known surfactant may be added is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass.
  • the developer may be used as a bath solution or a spray solution.
  • the temperature of the developer is usually preferably from about room temperature to 40 ° C.
  • the development time is usually about 10 seconds to 2 minutes, depending on the composition of the photosensitive resin layer, the alkalinity and temperature of the developer, and the type and concentration when an organic solvent is added. Within this range, a dark color separation wall having a suitable shape can be obtained. In other words, if the development time is too short, the development of the area to be developed and removed may be insufficient, and at the same time, the UV absorbance may be insufficient. Sometimes. It is also possible to put a water washing step after the development processing.
  • the height of the dark color separation wall in the present invention is preferably 1.0 to 6. and more preferably 1.5 to 5 in terms of the height in the substrate normal direction. If the height is within the above range, As described above, when ink droplets are formed by the ink jet method, ink spreads and protrudes beyond the dark color separation wall, color mixing between adjacent pixel patterns, and white spots in the pixel pattern. This is effective for forming a color filter with good hue and high display quality.
  • the width of the dark color separation wall in the present invention is preferably 5.0 ⁇ m or more and 50 ⁇ m or less in the direction perpendicular to the normal direction of the substrate. And the variation width of the thickness in the substrate normal direction of the colored region (R pixel, G pixel, B pixel, etc.) within m in the direction parallel to the substrate surface from the edge of the dark color separation wall (for example, the end surface) is 0.5 m or less is preferable.
  • the fluctuation range is within the above range, it is possible to effectively prevent display unevenness such as color unevenness in an image when the image is displayed in a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.
  • This fluctuation range is preferably not more than 0. It can be adjusted by adding a surfactant to the ink forming the colored pixels.
  • the substrate After cleaning the substrate, the substrate is heat treated to stabilize the surface state. Thereafter, the temperature of the substrate is adjusted, and the dark color composition is applied onto the temperature-controlled substrate. After coating, part of the solvent in the coating layer is dried to eliminate the fluidity of the layer, and then the unnecessary coating solution around the substrate is removed with an EBR (edge 'bead' remover) etc. A characteristic rosin layer is obtained.
  • the coating can be performed using a known glass substrate coater (for example, MH-1600 manufactured by FS Asia Co., Ltd.) provided with a slit-like nozzle.
  • the drying can be performed by a known drying apparatus (for example, V CD (vacuum drying apparatus; manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd.)), and the prebeta can be performed by heating at 120 ° C. for 3 minutes, for example.
  • V CD vacuum drying apparatus
  • the layer thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is as described above.
  • the distance between the mask surface and the photosensitive resin layer is appropriately set (for example, set to 200 m) and perform exposure in a nitrogen atmosphere by purging with nitrogen and controlling the oxygen partial pressure.
  • the exposure can be performed by, for example, a proximity type exposure machine (for example, manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd., Techtech Engineering Co., Ltd.) equipped with an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp. Exposure amount is appropriate (for example, 300mJ Zcm 2 ) Can be selected.
  • the oxygen partial pressure at this time can be measured using an oximeter (for example, G-102 manufactured by Iijima Electronics Co., Ltd.).
  • development processing is performed with a developer to obtain a pattern image, and washing with water is performed as necessary to obtain a dark color separation image wall.
  • the protective film of the photosensitive transfer material is peeled and removed, and the exposed surface of the photosensitive resin layer is overlaid on the substrate surface, passed through a laminator or the like, and heated and Z or pressurized to form a laminate.
  • the laminator can be appropriately selected from conventionally known laminators, vacuum laminators, and the like, and an auto-cut laminator can also be used from the viewpoint of increasing productivity.
  • the laminate strength temporary support is peeled off and removed.
  • a desired photomask for example, Sekihide exposure mask
  • the exposed surface oxygen barrier layer surface
  • the developer used for the development process and the light source used for the exposure are the same as the developer and the light source used in the coating method.
  • the formed deep color separation wall and the colored region are further heated (beta) to be cured (the following heat treatment and post-exposure) or the above-described dark color separation.
  • Other processes such as the process of applying ink repellent treatment to the dark color separation wall on the substrate after the image wall is formed and before the colored area forming process, and the OC process for forming the overcoat (OC) layer are provided. May be.
  • heat treatment also referred to as post-beta
  • the heat treatment temperature is preferably in the range of 150 to 250 ° C. When the temperature is within the above range, good hardness is obtained, and the color purity is good without coloring the resin.
  • the heat treatment time is preferably 10 to 150 minutes. When the time is within the above range, good hardness can be obtained, the resin is not colored, and the color purity is good.
  • the heat treatment may be changed depending on the color. Also before After all colors are formed by the ink jet method described above, the final heat treatment may be further performed to stabilize the hardness. In that case, it is preferable in terms of hardness to carry out at a higher temperature (for example, 240 ° C).
  • Post-exposure (also referred to as re-exposure) can be performed between development and heat treatment.
  • control of the cross-sectional shape of the dark color separation wall, control of the hardness of the dark color separation wall, control of surface unevenness of the dark color separation wall, and control of film reduction of the dark color separation wall It is preferable from the viewpoints.
  • the light source used for the post-exposure include an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, and a metal halide lamp described in paragraph No. [0074] of JP-A-2005-3861.
  • the substrate is directly irradiated with light having a light source such as an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp or a metal halide without using an exposure mask. If necessary, carry out from both sides of the substrate.
  • the exposure dose can be appropriately adjusted in the range of 100 to 2000 mjZcm 2 on the upper surface side and 100 to 2000 mj / cm 2 on the lower surface side according to the control purpose.
  • the ink repellent treatment for example, (1) a method of kneading an ink repellent substance on a dark color separation wall (for example, see JP-A-2005-36160), (2) a new ink repellent layer (3) A method for imparting ink repellency by plasma treatment (for example, see JP-A-2002-62420), (4) Dark color separation wall A method of applying an ink repellent material to the upper surface of the wall (see, for example, JP-A-10-123500), and in particular, (3) ink repellent by plasma on a dark color separation wall formed on a substrate. A method of applying a crystallization treatment is preferable.
  • the entire surface of the colored region and the dark color separation wall is formed for the purpose of improving the durability.
  • An overcoat layer can be formed so as to cover.
  • the overcoat layer can protect the colored areas such as R, G, and B and the dark-colored / high-color separation wall, and can also flatten the surface. However, it is preferable not to set up because the number of processes increases.
  • the overcoat layer can be formed using a resin (oc agent).
  • rosin (OC agent) examples thereof include an acrylic resin composition, an epoxy resin composition, and a polyimide resin composition. Above all, it is excellent in transparency in the visible light region, and the resin component of the photocurable composition for color filters usually has an acrylic resin as the main component, and since it has excellent adhesion, the acrylic resin A composition is desirable.
  • the overcoat layer include those described in paragraphs [0018] to [0028] of JP-A-2003-28 7618, and as an overcoat agent commercial product, Optomer 1 SS6699G manufactured by JSR Corporation may be mentioned. .
  • the color filter of the present invention is produced by the above-described method for producing the color filter of the present invention.
  • the color filter of the present invention is a portable terminal such as a television, a personal computer, a liquid crystal projector, a game machine, or a cellular phone. It can be suitably applied to applications such as digital cameras and car navigation systems without particular limitation.
  • ink Nos. 1 to 16 and inks N o.100 to 101 include inks of R, G, and B colors, respectively.
  • K pigment dispersion 1 and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd., MMPGAC) in the amounts shown in Table 3 below are removed and heated at a temperature of 24 ° C ( ⁇ 2 ° C).
  • Triazine and Surfactant 1 are weighed out and added in this order at a temperature of 25 ° C ( ⁇ 2 ° C) and a temperature of 40 ° C ( ⁇ 2 ° In C), a dark color composition K1 was prepared by stirring at 150 rpm for 30 minutes.
  • thermoplastic resin coating solution consisting of the following formulation HI, and dry it to make the thermoplastic A resin layer was formed.
  • an intermediate layer coating solution having the following formulation P1 was further applied onto this thermoplastic resin layer and dried to laminate the intermediate layer.
  • the dark color composition K1 obtained above was applied onto the intermediate layer and dried to further laminate a black dark color photosensitive layer.
  • thermoplastic resin layer having a dry film thickness of 14.6 ⁇ m, an intermediate layer having a dry film thickness of 1, and a dark photosensitive layer having a dry film thickness of m are formed on the PET temporary support.
  • a protective film polypropylene film with a thickness of 12 m
  • dark color photosensitive transfer material K1 a dark color photosensitive transfer material having a laminated structure of a temporary support Z, a thermoplastic resin layer, a Z intermediate layer, and a Z dark color photosensitive layer was produced.
  • this is referred to as dark color photosensitive transfer material K1.
  • thermoplastic resin layer Hl ⁇ Prescription of coating solution for thermoplastic resin layer Hl>
  • glass substrate An alkali-free glass substrate (hereinafter, simply referred to as “glass substrate”) was cleaned with a rotating brush having nylon hair while spraying a glass cleaning solution adjusted to 25 ° C. for 20 seconds by a shower. Further, after washing with pure water shower, a silane coupling solution (N- ⁇ (aminoethyl) ⁇ - aminopropyltrimethoxysilane 0.3 % aqueous solution; trade name: KBM603, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) is showered. Sprayed for 2 seconds and washed with pure water shower. Thereafter, this substrate was heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a substrate preheating apparatus.
  • silane coupling solution N- ⁇ (aminoethyl) ⁇ - aminopropyltrimethoxysilane 0.3 % aqueous solution; trade name: KBM603, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • the protective film was peeled and removed from the dark photosensitive transfer material K1 obtained above on the glass substrate after the silane coupling treatment. After superposition so that the surface of the dark photosensitive layer exposed by removal and the surface of the glass substrate are in contact with each other, a laminator Lamic II type (manufactured by Hitachi Industries Ltd.) is used, with a rubber roller temperature of 130 ° C. and a line. Lamination was performed under conditions of a pressure of 100 NZcm and a conveyance speed of 2. 2 mZ. Subsequently, the PET temporary support was peeled off at the interface between the PET temporary support and the thermoplastic resin layer, and the temporary support was removed and transferred.
  • a laminator Lamic II type manufactured by Hitachi Industries Ltd.
  • KOH-based developer KOH, containing non-ionic surfactant, CDK-1 (trade name; manufactured by Fuji Film Elect Kokuku Materials Co., Ltd.)
  • spray development is performed at 23 ° C for 80 seconds and with a flat nozzle at a pressure of 0.04 MPa, and shower development is performed.
  • the plastic rosin layer was removed.
  • a black pattern was obtained on the glass substrate.
  • the entire surface of the glass substrate was post-exposed with 2, OOOmiZcm 2 from the side of the glass substrate where the black pattern was formed using an aligner in the atmosphere, and a dark color separation with an optical density (D) of 4.0.
  • a wall was formed (hereinafter referred to as a dark color separation wall-mounted substrate).
  • the inks of R, G, and B of ink No. 1 shown in Table 2 were ejected on the dark color separation wall at an ejection speed of 7 mZ seconds by the inkjet method. After discharging to the enclosed recess and discharging until the height of the applied ink surface rises higher than the height of the dark color separation wall, place it on a hot plate for 2 minutes at 200 ° C Post-beta was performed to evaporate the solvent. At this time, the rise of the ink was flat. Furthermore, it was cured by post-beta in a 200 ° C oven for 1 hour. In this way, a color filter in which colored pixel portions of three colors of R pixel, G pixel, and B pixel were arranged on the substrate was obtained (hereinafter referred to as a color filter substrate).
  • an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) film was further formed on the R pixel, G pixel, B pixel, and dark color separation wall constituting the obtained color filter substrate by sputtering to form a transparent electrode.
  • a glass substrate as the counter substrate, and apply an etching resist for PVA mode on the transparent electrode of the color filter substrate and on the counter substrate, respectively. And patterned.
  • a photospacer is provided on the transparent electrode (ITO film) of the color filter substrate above the dark color separation wall, and an alignment film made of polyimide is further formed thereon.
  • an alignment film made of polyimide is further formed thereon.
  • a sealant of epoxy resin is printed on the outer peripheral wall of the partition wall so as to surround the entire color pixel portion of the RGB color of the color filter substrate, and a PVA mode liquid crystal is dropped on the opposite substrate. After bonding, the bonded substrates were heat-treated to cure the sealing agent, and a liquid crystal cell was produced.
  • a polarizing plate HLC2-2518 manufactured by Sanritz Co., Ltd. was attached to the substrate surfaces on both sides of the produced liquid crystal cell.
  • a cold cathode tube was used to form a backlight, and this knock light was placed on the side of the liquid crystal cell on which the polarizing plate was provided to provide a liquid crystal display device.
  • Example 1 except that the ink No. 1 was replaced with each of the ink Nos. 2 to 16 shown in Table 2 above, a color filter substrate was prepared and a liquid crystal display device was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1. Produced.
  • Example 1 a color filter substrate was produced and a liquid crystal display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the dark color separation wall was formed by the transfer method by the coating method shown below. did.
  • An alkali-free glass substrate (hereinafter referred to as a unit “glass substrate”) was cleaned with a UV cleaning device, then brush-cleaned with a cleaning agent, and further ultrasonically cleaned with ultrapure water. Thereafter, the glass substrate was heat treated at 120 ° C for 3 minutes to stabilize the surface state.
  • the temperature was adjusted to 23 ° C, and the glass substrate coater with a slit-like nozzle, MH-1600 (manufactured by F'AS Asia Co., Ltd.), was obtained from the above. Color composition K1 was applied. Subsequently, using a VCD (vacuum dryer, manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd.), part of the solvent is dried for 30 seconds to eliminate the fluidity of the coating layer, and then pre-beta for 3 minutes at 120 ° C.
  • VCD vacuum dryer, manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd.
  • a dark photosensitive layer K1 having a thickness of 2 m was formed.
  • a proximity-type exposure machine equipped with an ultra-high-pressure mercury lamp manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd., Techtech Engineering Co., Ltd.
  • a glass substrate and mask quartz with an image pattern on which a dark photosensitive layer K1 is formed
  • pattern exposure was performed at a dose of 300 miZcm 2 in a nitrogen atmosphere.
  • pure water is sprayed with a shower nozzle to uniformly wet the surface of the dark photosensitive layer K1, and then a KOH developer (KOH, containing a nonionic surfactant, CDK-1) (Product name: Fujifilm Elect Mouth-X Materials Co., Ltd.) diluted 100 times with pure water) and sprayed at 23 ° C for 80 seconds with a flat nozzle at a pressure of 0.04 MPa And developed with a shower to obtain a black pattern. Subsequently, ultrapure water was sprayed at a pressure of 9.8 MPa with an ultrahigh pressure washing nozzle to remove residues. Further, post-exposure was performed at an exposure dose of 2, OOOmjZcm 2 in the atmosphere. In this way, a dark color separation wall having an optical density of 3.9 was formed to produce a substrate with a dark color separation wall.
  • KOH containing a nonionic surfactant, CDK-1 (Product name: Fujifilm Elect Mouth-X Materials Co., Ltd.)
  • a color filter was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the formulation of the dark color composition used for forming the dark color separation wall in Example 1 was changed from the dark color composition K1 to the dark color composition K2.
  • a substrate was fabricated and a liquid crystal display device was fabricated.
  • a color filter substrate was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that ink No. 1 was replaced with ink No. 100 or No. 101 shown in Table 2 in Example 1 and a liquid crystal substrate was prepared. A display device was produced.
  • the variation width of the thickness (thickness in the substrate normal direction) of the R pixel, G pixel, and B pixel within 10 m in the direction parallel to the substrate surface from the edge of the dark color separation wall Measured with a stylus type film thickness meter (P10, manufactured by KLA-Tencor Co., Ltd.) Evaluation was performed according to the evaluation criteria.
  • Each liquid crystal display device is energized to display R, G, B monochromatic images, gray test signals are input, display irregularities when the images are displayed are observed with a loupe, and the following evaluation criteria are used. And evaluated.
  • Example 1 No. 1 Transfer 0.32 0.35 0.34 AA
  • Example 2 No. 2 Transfer 0.43 0.42 0.44 AA
  • Example 3 No. 3 Transfer 0.35 0.37 0.36 AA
  • Example 4 No. 4 o Transfer 0.46 0.48 0.44 AA
  • Example 5 No. 5 Transfer 0.42 0.45 0.41 AA
  • Example 6 No. 6 Transfer 0.46 0.42 0.47 AA
  • Example 7 No. 7 Transfer 0.38 0.39 0.41 AA
  • Example 8 No. 8 Transfer 0.44 0.43 0.45 AA
  • Example 9 No. 9 Transfer 0.41 0.44 0.42 AA
  • Example 1 0 No. 10 Transfer 0.40 0.41 0.42 AA
  • Example 1 2 No. 12 Transfer 0.47 0.46 0.44 AA
  • Example 1 3 No.
  • the colored pixel portions of the R, G, and B colors formed by ejecting ink between the dark color separation walls were excellent in flatness. Further, in the example, the occurrence of display unevenness of the display image was not recognized, and an image display with high display quality could be performed. On the other hand, in the comparative example, the flatness of the colored pixel portion was inferior, and display unevenness occurred in the display image.
  • the disclosure of Japanese application 2005—380199 is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

Abstract

An ink composition which has suitability for general-purpose use and is effective in forming a colored region having improved flatness (in particular, flatness around partition walls for deep-color separation) through droplet impartation by the ink-jet method. The ink-jet ink composition for color filters, which is for use in forming a colored region through droplet impartation by the ink-jet method, comprises a colorant and a fluorochemical surfactant (copolymer) comprising at least one structural unit (a) derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (a) and at least one structural unit (b) derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (b), the proportion of the structural unit (a) to the structural unit (b), (a/b), being from 20/80 to 60/40 by mass [R1 to R3 each is H or methyl; R4 is H or C1-5 alkyl; m is 2-14; n is 1-18; and p and q each is 0-18 (provided that p=q≠0)].

Description

明 細 書  Specification
インクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物、カラーフィルタ及びその製造 方法、並びに液晶表示装置  Ink composition for inkjet color filter, color filter, method for producing the same, and liquid crystal display device
技術分野  Technical field
[0001] 本発明は、インクジェット法により液滴付与して着色画素を形成するのに好適なイン クジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物、並びに着色画素がインクジェット法で液滴 付与してなるカラーフィルタ及びその製造方法、液晶表示装置に関する。  [0001] The present invention relates to an ink composition for an inkjet color filter that is suitable for forming colored pixels by applying droplets by an inkjet method, a color filter in which colored pixels are applied by droplets by an inkjet method, and the same The present invention relates to a manufacturing method and a liquid crystal display device.
背景技術  Background art
[0002] 表示装置用カラーフィルタは、例えば、ガラス等の基板上に赤色 (R)、緑色 (G)、 青色 (B)等のドット状画像をマトリックス状に配置し、ドット状に設けられた画像と画像 との間をブラックマトリックス等の濃色離画壁で隔離した構造を有している。  [0002] A color filter for a display device is provided in a dot shape, for example, by arranging dot-like images such as red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in a matrix on a substrate such as glass. It has a structure in which images are separated from each other by a dark color separation wall such as a black matrix.
[0003] カラーフィルタを作製する方法には、従来から、(1)染色法、(2)印刷法、(3)着色し た感光性榭脂液の塗布、露光、及び現像して着色されたパターン像を形成する方法 (着色レジスト法;例えば、特許文献 1〜3参照)、(4)仮支持体上に形成されたバタ ーン画像を順次、最終もしくは仮の基材上に転写する方法 (例えば、特許文献 4〜6 参照)、(5)着色した感光性榭脂液を予め仮支持体上に塗布等して感光性着色層を 形成しておき、この感光性着色層を最終もしくは仮の基材上に直接転写し、露光し、 現像して着色されたパターン像を形成する方法 (転写法)が知られて ヽる(例えば、 特許文献 7参照)。また、インクジェット法を用いる方法も知られている(例えば、特許 文献 8参照)。  [0003] Conventionally, color filters have been colored by (1) dyeing method, (2) printing method, (3) application of colored photosensitive resin solution, exposure, and development. Method for forming a pattern image (colored resist method; see, for example, Patent Documents 1 to 3), (4) Method for sequentially transferring a pattern image formed on a temporary support onto a final or temporary substrate (See, for example, Patent Documents 4 to 6), (5) A photosensitive colored layer is formed by applying a colored photosensitive resin solution on a temporary support in advance, and the photosensitive colored layer is finally or A method (transfer method) for forming a colored pattern image by directly transferring, exposing and developing on a temporary substrate is known (for example, see Patent Document 7). A method using an ink jet method is also known (see, for example, Patent Document 8).
[0004] これらの方法のうち、前記着色レジスト法は、位置精度高くカラーフィルタを作製で きる。しかし、着色レジスト法は、感光層榭脂液の塗布にロスが多ぐコスト的には有 利とはいえない。また、前記インクジェット法によるのみでは、榭脂液のロスが少なくコ スト的に有利である力 位置精度のよい画素が得られにくい傾向がある。  Among these methods, the colored resist method can produce a color filter with high positional accuracy. However, the colored resist method is not advantageous in terms of cost due to a large loss in the application of the photosensitive layer resin solution. Further, only by the ink jet method, there is a tendency that it is difficult to obtain a pixel with good force position accuracy that is less costly and less costly.
[0005] 上記に対応して、ブラックマトリックスを着色レジスト法で形成し、その後に RGB等 の着色パターン (画素)を、インクジェット法を利用して形成する方法が提案されてい る。 [0006] ところが、ブラックマトリックスなどの隔壁で周囲が取り囲まれた凹部 (着色層形成領 域)に着色インク (R, G, B等)を打滴してカラーフィルタを作製する場合、着色インク の固形分濃度が低いときには、打滴量が足りないと乾燥後に所望厚が得られないた め、隔壁で取り囲まれた凹部の体積以上に着色インクを打滴する必要がある。しかし 、溶剤の揮発に伴なつて着色層(画素)内の隔壁近傍に凹凸が発生してしまい、表 示装置 (パネル)を形成した際に表示ムラを起こす一因となる。 [0005] Corresponding to the above, a method has been proposed in which a black matrix is formed by a colored resist method, and then a colored pattern (pixel) such as RGB is formed by using an inkjet method. However, when a colored ink (R, G, B, etc.) is deposited on a recess (colored layer forming region) surrounded by a partition such as a black matrix to produce a color filter, When the solid content concentration is low, a desired thickness cannot be obtained after drying unless the amount of droplet ejection is sufficient. Therefore, it is necessary to deposit colored ink over the volume of the recess surrounded by the partition walls. However, as the solvent evaporates, irregularities occur in the vicinity of the partition walls in the colored layer (pixels), which causes display unevenness when a display device (panel) is formed.
[0007] これに関連して、用いる溶剤の表面エネルギー、沸点などを調整して着色層表面 の平坦性を改善する技術が知られている。この技術は、特殊な溶剤を用いる必要が ある。したがって、汎用性を含めた更なる検討が不可欠とされていた。  [0007] In this connection, a technique for improving the flatness of the colored layer surface by adjusting the surface energy and boiling point of the solvent used is known. This technology requires the use of special solvents. Therefore, further studies including versatility were considered essential.
[0008] 一方、カラーフィルタの作製に、特定の界面活性剤を含有する組成物を用いること が知られている(例えば、特許文献 9参照)。これ〖こよると、基板塗布後の製造過程に おける影響を受けて塗布面状が損なわれるのを防止できるとされている。  On the other hand, it is known to use a composition containing a specific surfactant for the production of a color filter (see, for example, Patent Document 9). According to this, it is said that it is possible to prevent the coated surface from being damaged due to the influence in the manufacturing process after coating the substrate.
[0009] また、カラーフィルタ作製用の榭脂組成物に、添加剤としてフッ素系の界面活性剤 を必要に応じて用いることができることが開示されている(例えば、特許文献 10参照) 特許文献 1:特開昭 63— 298304号公報  [0009] Further, it is disclosed that a fluorosurfactant can be used as an additive in a resin composition for producing a color filter as required (see, for example, Patent Document 10) Patent Document 1 : JP-A 63-298304
特許文献 2:特開昭 63 - 309916号公報  Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 63-309916
特許文献 3 :特開平 1 152449号公報  Patent Document 3: JP-A-1 152449
特許文献 4:特開昭 61 - 99103号公報  Patent Document 4: JP-A 61-99103
特許文献 5:特開昭 61— 233704号公報  Patent Document 5: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 61-233704
特許文献 6:特開昭 61 - 279802号公報  Patent Document 6: JP-A 61-279802
特許文献 7 :特開昭 61— 99102号公報  Patent Document 7: JP-A-61-99102
特許文献 8:特開平 8 - 227012号公報  Patent Document 8: JP-A-8-227012
特許文献 9:特開 2003 - 337424号公報  Patent Document 9: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-337424
特許文献 10:特開 2000 - 310706号公報  Patent Document 10: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-310706
発明の開示  Disclosure of the invention
発明が解決しょうとする課題  Problems to be solved by the invention
[0010] 上記のように、基板上に予め形成された隔壁 (濃色離画壁)間にインクジェット法に より液状インクを打滴して画素パターンを形成する技術にっ ヽては種々検討がなさ れている。し力しながら、溶剤の揮発等によるインクの乾燥後には、画素となる着色領 域の表面に凹凸形状ができやすぐ単にフッ素系等の界面活性剤を任意に含有する だけでは、溶剤乾燥後の平坦性が良好な着色層(画素パターン)を形成することは困 難である。 [0010] As described above, an inkjet method is used between partition walls (dark color separation walls) formed in advance on a substrate. Various studies have been made on techniques for forming pixel patterns by ejecting more liquid ink. However, after drying the ink due to solvent volatilization, etc., the surface of the colored area that becomes the pixel has an uneven shape, and immediately after the solvent is dried, simply containing a fluorine-based surfactant or the like. It is difficult to form a colored layer (pixel pattern) with good flatness.
[0011] 本発明は、前記状況に鑑みなされたものであり、汎用性が高ぐインクジェット法で 液滴付与してなる着色領域の平坦性 (特に濃色離画壁近傍の平坦性)に優れたカラ 一フィルタ (これを構成する着色画素を含む。 )を得ることができるインクジェットカラー フィルタ用インク組成物を提供する。また、本発明は、表示ムラがなく表示品位の高 [0011] The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is excellent in flatness of a colored region (particularly in the vicinity of a dark color separation wall) formed by applying droplets by an inkjet method having high versatility. An ink composition for an inkjet color filter capable of obtaining a color filter (including colored pixels constituting the color filter) is provided. In addition, the present invention has no display unevenness and high display quality.
V、カラーフィルタ及びその製造方法、並びに液晶表示装置を提供する。 V, a color filter, a manufacturing method thereof, and a liquid crystal display device are provided.
課題を解決するための手段  Means for solving the problem
[0012] 前記課題を達成するための具体的手段は以下の通りである。  [0012] Specific means for achieving the above object are as follows.
< 1 > インクジェット法で液滴付与してなる着色領域の形成に用いられるインクジ エツトカラ一フィルタ用インク組成物であって、着色剤及びフッ素系界面活性剤を含 み、前記フッ素系界面活性剤が、下記一般式 (a)で表されるモノマーに由来の構成 単位 aの少なくとも一つと下記一般式 (b)で表されるモノマーに由来の構成単位 bの 少なくとも一つとを有し、前記構成単位 aと構成単位 bとの質量比 (aZb)が 20Z80 〜60Z40である共重合体である共重合体であるインクジェットカラーフィルタ用イン ク組成物である。  <1> An ink jet color filter ink composition used for forming a colored region formed by applying droplets by an inkjet method, comprising a colorant and a fluorosurfactant, wherein the fluorosurfactant comprises A structural unit derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (a) and at least one structural unit b derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (b): An ink composition for an inkjet color filter, which is a copolymer that is a copolymer having a mass ratio (aZb) of a to the structural unit b of 20Z80 to 60Z40.
[0013] [化 1] [0013] [Chemical 1]
Figure imgf000005_0001
前記一般式 (a)又は (b)において、 及び Rは各々独立に、水素原子又はメ チル基を表す。 R4は、水素原子又は炭素数 1〜5のアルキル基を表す。 mは、 2〜14 の整数を表し、 nは 1〜18の整数を表す。 p及び qは、各々独立に 0〜18の整数を表 し、 pと qとが同時に 0を表すことはない。
Figure imgf000005_0001
In the general formula (a) or (b), and R are each independently a hydrogen atom or a Represents a til group. R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. m represents an integer of 2 to 14, and n represents an integer of 1 to 18. p and q each independently represent an integer of 0 to 18, and p and q do not represent 0 at the same time.
[0015] < 2> 前記フッ素系界面活性剤の含有量力 インク糸且成物の全質量の 0. 01〜0 . 2質量%であることを特徴とする前記く 1 >に記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用 インク組成物である。 <2> Content power of the fluorosurfactant Inkjet color filter as described in <1> above, which is 0.01 to 0.2% by mass of the total mass of the ink yarn and the composition. It is an ink composition.
[0016] < 3 > 前記構成単位 aの少なくとも一つは、 R1が水素原子であって、 C F 力 m 2m+l<3> At least one of the structural units a is such that R 1 is a hydrogen atom and a CF force m 2m + l
-C F であって、 nが 2であるモノマーに由来の単位であることを特徴とする前記く 1-C F, wherein n is a unit derived from a monomer of 2,
6 13 6 13
>又はく 2 >に記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物である。  > Or <2> The ink composition for an inkjet color filter according to <2>.
<4> 前記構成単位 bの少なくとも一つは、 R2が水素原子であって、 R3力メチル基 であって、 R4が水素原子であって、 pが 7であって、 qが 0であるモノマーに由来の単 位であることを特徴とする前記く 1 >〜< 3 >のいずれか 1つに記載のインクジェット カラーフィルタ用インク組成物である。 <4> At least one of the structural units b is as follows: R 2 is a hydrogen atom, R 3 force methyl group, R 4 is a hydrogen atom, p is 7, and q is 0 The ink composition for an inkjet color filter according to any one of 1) to <3>, wherein the ink composition is derived from a monomer that is
< 5 > 前記構成単位 bの少なくとも一つは、 R2が水素原子であって、 R3が水素原 子であって、 R4が水素原子であって、 pが 0であって、 qが 7であるモノマーに由来の 単位であることを特徴とする前記く 1 >〜 < 4 >の 、ずれか 1つに記載のインクジエツ トカラ一フィルタ用インク組成物である。 <5> At least one of the structural units b is as follows: R 2 is a hydrogen atom, R 3 is a hydrogen atom, R 4 is a hydrogen atom, p is 0, and q is 7. The ink composition for an ink jet color filter according to any one of the above items 1> to <4>, wherein the ink composition is a unit derived from a monomer of 7.
< 6 > 前記フッ素系界面活性剤力 20〜60質量%の前記構成単位 aと 80〜40 質量%の前記構成単位 bとを含む 2元もしくは 3元以上の共重合体であることを特徴 とする前記く 1 >〜< 5 >のいずれか 1つに記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用ィ ンク組成物である。  <6> A binary or ternary or higher copolymer containing 20 to 60% by mass of the structural unit a and 80 to 40% by mass of the structural unit b. The ink composition for ink-jet color filters according to any one of the above items 1> to <5>.
< 7> 前記構成単位 aの割合が 25〜60質量%であり、前記構成単位 bの割合が 60〜40質量0 /0であることを特徴とする前記く 6 >に記載のインクジェットカラーフィ ルタ用インク組成物である。 <7> The proportion of the structural unit a is 25 to 60 wt%, the ink jet color filter according to the rather 6> the proportion of the structural unit b is characterized in that it is a 60 to 40 weight 0/0 Ink composition.
< 8 > 前記フッ素系界面活性剤の含有量が、インク組成物の全質量の 0. 05〜0 . 15質量0 /0であることを特徴とする前記 < 2 >に記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ 用インク組成物である。 <8> The content of the fluorine-based surfactant, for ink jet color filter according to <2>, which is a 0.05 to 0.15 weight 0/0 of the total weight of the ink composition Ink composition.
< 9 > 重合性化合物と重合開始剤とを更に含むことを特徴とする前記く 1 >〜< 8 >のいずれか 1つに記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物である。 <9> The above-described <1>, further comprising a polymerizable compound and a polymerization initiator 8> The ink composition for inkjet color filters according to any one of 8>.
[0017] < 10> 基板上に色相の異なる 2色以上の画素群と前記画素群を構成する各画 素を互いに離隔する遮光性の濃色離画壁とを有するカラーフィルタの製造方法であ つて、前記濃色離画壁で離隔されている凹部に、前記 < 1 >〜< 9 >のいずれか 1 つに記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物をインクジェット法により付与 して着色領域を形成する工程を有するカラーフィルタの製造方法である。 <10> A method for producing a color filter having a pixel group of two or more colors having different hues on a substrate and a light-shielding dark color separation wall that separates the pixels constituting the pixel group from each other. Thus, a colored region is formed by applying the ink composition for an inkjet color filter according to any one of <1> to <9> to the recesses separated by the dark color separation wall by an inkjet method. A method of manufacturing a color filter having a step of:
< 11 > 前記濃色離画壁の、基板法線方向における高さが 1. 0〜6. O /z mである ことを特徴とする前記く 10 >に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法である。  <11> The method for producing a color filter according to <10>, wherein the dark color separation wall has a height in the normal direction of the substrate of 1.0 to 6. O / zm.
< 12> 前記濃色離画壁の端部から基板面と平行方向に m以内における着 色領域の、基板法線方向における厚みの変動幅が 0. 5 μ m以下である前記 < 10 > 又はく 11 >に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法である。  <12> The above <10> or <10>, wherein the variation range of the thickness in the normal direction of the colored region within 0.5 m in the direction parallel to the substrate surface from the edge of the dark color separation wall is 0.5 μm or less <11> The method for producing a color filter according to <11>.
[0018] < 13 > 前記着色領域を形成する工程で形成された少なくとも 1色の着色領域に 活性光線を照射して硬化する第 1の硬化工程を更に有することを特徴とする前記 < 1 0>〜< 12>の!、ずれか 1つに記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法である。 <13> The above <10>, further comprising a first curing step of irradiating at least one colored region formed in the step of forming the colored region with an actinic ray to cure. ~ <12> !, the deviation is one of the methods for producing a color filter.
< 14> 前記第 1の硬化工程後に、赤色 (R)、緑色 (G)、及び青色 (B)を含む所 望の色相の着色領域の全てを熱により硬化する第 2の硬化工程を更に有することを 特徴とする前記く 13 >に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法である。  <14> After the first curing step, the method further includes a second curing step in which all the colored regions having a desired hue including red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are cured by heat. The method for producing a color filter as described in 13> above.
[0019] < 15 > 前記 < 10>〜< 14>のいずれ力 1つに記載のカラーフィルタの製造方 法により作製されたカラーフィルタである。 [0019] <15> A color filter produced by the method for producing a color filter according to any one of <10> to <14>.
< 16 > 前記く 15 >に記載のカラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示装置である。  <16> A liquid crystal display device comprising the color filter according to <15>.
発明の効果  The invention's effect
[0020] 本発明によれば、汎用性が高ぐインクジェット法で液滴付与してなる着色領域の 平坦性 (特に濃色離画壁近傍の平坦性)に優れたカラーフィルタ (これを構成する着 色画素を含む。 )を得ることができるインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物を提 供することができる。  [0020] According to the present invention, a color filter excellent in flatness of a colored region (particularly in the vicinity of a dark color separation wall) formed by applying droplets by an inkjet method having high versatility (constitutes this) Ink composition for ink-jet color filter can be provided which can provide colored pixels.
また、本発明によれば、表示ムラがなく表示品位の高いカラーフィルタ及びその製 造方法、並びに液晶表示装置を提供することができる。  In addition, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a color filter having no display unevenness and high display quality, a manufacturing method thereof, and a liquid crystal display device.
発明を実施するための最良の形態 [0021] 以下、本発明のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク糸且成物について詳細に説明す る。また、このインク組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ及びその製造方法、並びに液晶 表示装置の詳細につ 、ても述べる。 BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION [0021] Hereinafter, the ink yarn composition for an inkjet color filter of the present invention will be described in detail. Details of the color filter using this ink composition, a method for producing the same, and a liquid crystal display device are also described.
[0022] くインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物 >  [0022] Ink Composition for Inkjet Color Filter>
本発明のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物(以下、「本発明のインク組成 物」ということがある。)は、着色剤及び下記の本発明に係るフッ素系界面活性剤を少 なくとも含む。本発明のインク組成物は、インクジェット法によりインクを濃色離画壁で 取り囲まれた凹部に液滴付与してなる着色領域の形成に用いられる。また、本発明 のインク組成物は、更に必要に応じて、重合性化合物、重合開始剤、溶剤、及びそ の他成分を用いて構成することができる。  The ink composition for ink-jet color filters of the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the ink composition of the present invention”) contains at least a colorant and the following fluorosurfactant according to the present invention. The ink composition of the present invention is used to form a colored region formed by applying droplets to a recess surrounded by a dark color separation wall by an inkjet method. In addition, the ink composition of the present invention can be constituted by using a polymerizable compound, a polymerization initiator, a solvent, and other components as required.
[0023] 本発明のインク組成物は、インクジェット法により濃色離画壁間に液滴付与してカラ 一フィルタを構成する着色領域を形成する際に、液滴付与された着色領域の表面を 良好な平坦性に形成することができ、表示ムラのな!、表示品位の高 ヽ画像表示を行 なうことができる。  [0023] The ink composition of the present invention provides a surface of a colored region to which droplets have been applied when droplets are applied between dark color separation walls by an inkjet method to form a colored region that constitutes a color filter. It can be formed with good flatness, display non-uniformity, and high-quality image display with display quality.
[0024] 本発明にお 、て、平坦性であるとは、カラーフィルタを構成する着色領域 (R画素、 G画素、 B画素等となる着色層)の、濃色離画壁の端部から基板面と平行方向に 10 /z m以内における厚みの変動幅のことをいう。この変動幅は、 0. 以下が好まし い。この変動幅は、触針式膜厚計 (ケーエルエー'テンコール (株)製の P10)を用い て測定されるものである。  [0024] In the present invention, flatness means from the end of the dark color separation wall of the colored region (colored layer that becomes R pixel, G pixel, B pixel, etc.) constituting the color filter. Thickness variation within 10 / zm in the direction parallel to the substrate surface. The fluctuation range is preferably less than 0. This fluctuation range is measured using a stylus type film thickness meter (P10, manufactured by KLA-Tencor Corporation).
[0025] 以下、本発明のインク組成物を構成する各成分について詳述する。  [0025] Hereinafter, each component constituting the ink composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
(着色剤)  (Coloring agent)
本発明のインク組成物は、公知の着色剤 (染料、顔料)を用いて構成することができ る。公知の着色剤のうち、顔料を用いる場合は着色液体組成物中に均一に分散され ていることが望ましい。したがって、顔料の粒径としては、 0. 1 m以下が好ましぐ特 には 0. 08 m以下であることが好ましい。  The ink composition of the present invention can be constituted using a known colorant (dye, pigment). Among known colorants, when a pigment is used, it is desirable that the pigment is uniformly dispersed in the colored liquid composition. Accordingly, the particle diameter of the pigment is preferably 0.1 m or less, particularly preferably 0.08 m or less.
[0026] 公知の染料ないし顔料としては、例えば、ビクトリア 'ピュア一ブルー BO (C. I. 425 95)、オーラミン(C. I. 41000)、フアツ卜-ブラック HB (C. I. 26150)、 C. I.ビグメン ト.イェロー 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 3、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 12、 C. I.ピグメ ント ·イェロー 13、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 14、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 5、 C. I.ピ グメント 'イェロー 16、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 17、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 20、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 24、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 31、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 55 、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 60、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 61、 C. I.ビグメント 'イエロ 一 65、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 71、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 73、 C. I.ビグメント 'ィ エロー 74、 C. I.ピグメント 'イェロー 81、 C. I.ピグメント 'イェロー 83、 C. I.ピグメン ト.イェロー 93、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 95、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 97、 C. I.ピ グメント 'イェロー 98、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 100、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 101、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 104、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 106、 C. I.ビグメント 'イエ ロー 108、 C. I.ビグメントイエロー 109、 C. I.ビグメントイエロー 110、 C. I.ピグメ ン卜.イェロー 113、 C. I.ビグメン卜'イェロー 114、 C. I.ビグメン卜'イェロー 116、 C . I.ビグメン卜'イェロー 117、 C. I.ビグメン卜'イェロー 119、 C. I.ビグメン卜'イエロ 一 120、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 126、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 127、 C. I.ビグメン ト.イェロー 128、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 129、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 138、 C. I .ビグメント 'イェロー 139、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 150、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 1 51、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 152、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 153、 C. I.ビグメント- イエロー 154、 C. I.ビグメン卜'イェロー 155、 C. I.ビグメン卜'イェロー 156、 C. I. ビグメント 'イェロー 166、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 168、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 17 5、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 180、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 185 ; [0026] Known dyes or pigments include, for example, Victoria 'Pure One Blue BO (CI 425 95), Auramin (CI 41000), Huaz-Black HB (CI 26150), CI Pigment, Yellow 1, CI Pigment 'Yellow 3, CI Pigment''Yellow 12, CI Pigme Yellow, 13, CI pigment 'Yellow 14, CI pigment' Yellow 5, CI pigment 'Yellow 16, CI pigment' Yellow 17, CI pigment 'Yellow 20, CI pigment' Yellow 24, CI pigment 'Yellow 31, CI pigment 'Yellow 55, CI Pigment' Yellow 60, CI Pigment 'Yellow 61, CI Pigment' Yellow 65, CI Pigment 'Yellow 71, CI Pigment' Yellow 73, CI Pigment 'Yellow 74, CI Pigment' Yellow 81, CI Pigment 'Yellow 83, CI Pigment; Yellow 93, CI Pigment' Yellow 95, CI Pigment 'Yellow 97, CI Pigment' Yellow 98, CI Pigment 'Yellow 100, CI Pigment' Yellow 101, CI Pigment 'Yellow 104, CI Pigment 'Yellow 106, CI Big Pigment''Yellow 108, CI Big Bear Yellow 109, CI Pigment Yellow 110, CI Pigment 卜. Yellow 113, CI Big Men 卜 'Yellow 114, CI Big Men 卜' Yellow 116, C. I. Big Men 卜 'Yellow 117, CI Pigment 卜' Yellow 119, CI Pigment 卜 Yellow 120, CI Pigment 'Yellow 126, CI Pigment' Yellow 127, CI Pigment Yellow 128, CI Pigment 'Yellow 129, CI Pigment' Yellow 138, C. I. Pigment 'Yellow 139, CI Pigment' Yellow 150, CI Pigment 'Yellow 1 51, CI Pigment' Yellow 152, CI Pigment 'Yellow 153, CI Pigment-Yellow 154, CI Pigment 卜' Yellow 155, CI Pigment 卜 'Yellow 156, CI Pigment' Yellow 166, CI Pigment 'Yellow 168, CI Pigment' Yellow 17 '5, CI Pigment' Yellow 180, CI Pigment 'Yellow 185 ;
C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 5、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 13 、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 14、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 16、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレン ジ 17、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 24、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 34、 C. I.ビグメント' オレンジ 36、 C. I.ピグメント.オレンジ 38、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 40、 C. I.ピグメ ン卜'オレンジ 43、 C. I.ビグメン卜 ·オレンジ 46、 C. I.ビグメン卜'オレンジ 49、 C. I. ビグメント 'オレンジ 51、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 61、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 63、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 64、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 71、 C. I.ビグメント 'オレンジ 73 ;C. I.ピグメント.ノィ: レット 1、 G. I.ピグメント.ノィ: レット 19、 C. I.ピグメント .ノ ィォレゝノト 23、 C. I.ピグメント.ノ ィォレゝノト 29、 C. I.ピグメント.ノ ィォレゝノト 32、 C. I.ピグメント.ノ ィォレゝノト 36、 C. I.ピグメント.ノ ィォレゝノト 38 ; CI Pigment 'Orange 1, CI Pigment' Orange 5, CI Pigment 'Orange 13, CI Pigment' Orange 14, CI Pigment 'Orange 16, CI Pigment' Orange 17, CI Pigment 'Orange 24, CI Pigment' Orange 34, CI CI Pigment Orange 36, CI Pigment Orange 38, CI Pigment 'Orange 40, CI Pigment 卜' Orange 43, CI Pigment ビ Orange 46, CI Pigment 卜 Orange 49, CI Pigment 'Orange 51, CI Pigment' Orange 61 CI Pigment 'Orange 63, CI Pigment' Orange 64, CI Pigment 'Orange 71, CI Pigment' Orange 73; CI Pigment Noy: GI Pigment No .: LI Pigment No .: Let 19, No. 23 CI Pigment No. 23, CI Pigment Nonot 29, CI Pigment Nonot 32, CI Pigment Nore 36, CI Pigment 38;
C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 2、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 3、 C. I.ピ グメント 'レッド 4、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 5、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 6、 C. I.ビグメントレッド 7、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド. 8、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 9、 C. I.ビグメント 'レツ 10 、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 11、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 12、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 14、 C . I.ビグメント 'レッド 15、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 16、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 17、 C. I. ビグメント 'レッド 18、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 19、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 21、 C. I.ビグ メント.レッド 22、 C. I.ピグメント.レッド 23、 C. I.ピグメント.レッド 30、 C. I.ビグメン ト.レッド 31、 C. I.ピグメント.レッド 32、 C. I.ピグメント.レッド 37、 C. I.ピグメント.レ ッド 38、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 40、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 41、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 42、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 48 : 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 48 : 2、 C. I.ビグメント 'レツ ド 48 : 3、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 48 :4、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 49 : 1、 C. I.ビグメント- レッド 49 : 2、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 50 : 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 52 : 1、 C. I.ピグメ ント 'レッド 53 : 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 57、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 57 : 1、 C. I.ビグ メント 'レッド 57 : 2、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 58 : 2、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 58 :4、 C. I. ビグメント 'レッド 60 : 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 63 : 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 63 : 2、 C . I.ビグメント 'レッド 64 : 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 81 : 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 83、CI Pigment 'Red 1, CI Pigment' Red 2, CI Pigment 'Red 3, CI Pigment' Red 4, CI Pigment 'Red 5, CI Pigment' Red 6, CI Pigment Red 7, CI Pigment 'Red. 8, CI Pigment 'Red 9, CI Pigment' Let 10, CI Pigment 'Red 11, CI Pigment' Red 12, CI Pigment 'Red 14, CI Pigment' Red 15, CI Pigment 'Red 16, CI Pigment' Red 16 , CI Pigment 'Red 18, CI Pigment' Red 19, CI Pigment 'Red 21, CI Pigment.Red 22, CI Pigment.Red 23, CI Pigment.Red 30, CI Pigment.Red 31, CI Pigment.Red 32 CI Pigment Red 37, CI Pigment Red 38, CI Pigment 'Le , CI Pigment 'Red 41, CI Pigment' Red 42, CI Pigment 'Red 48: 1, CI Pigment' Red 48: 2, CI Pigment 'Red 48: 3, CI Pigment Red 48: 4, CI Pigment Red 49: 1, CI Pigment-Red 49: 2, CI Pigment 'Red 50: 1, CI Pigment' Red 52: 1, CI Pigment 'Red 53: 1, CI Pigment' Red 57, CI Pigment 'Red 57: 1, CI Pigment 'Red 57: 2, CI Pigment' Red 58: 2, CI Pigment 'Red 58: 4, CI Pigment' Red 60: 1, CI Pigment 'Red 63: 1, CI Pigment' Red 63 : 2, C.I. pigment 'Red 64: 1, CI pigment' Red 81: 1, CI pigment 'Red 83,
C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 88、 C. I ビグメント 'レッド 90 : 1 、 C. I.ピグメント.レッド 97、 CC. I. Pigment 'Red 88, C. I Pigment' Red 90: 1, C. I. Pigment. Red 97, C
. I.ビグメント レッド 101、 C. I.ビグメント レッド 102、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 104、 CI. Pigment Red 101, C. I. Pigment Red 102, C. I. Pigment Red 104, C
. I.ビグメント レッド 105、 C. I.ビグメント レッド 106、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 108、 CI. Pigment Red 105, C. I. Pigment Red 106, C. I. Pigment Red 108, C
. I.ビグメント レッド 112、 C. I.ビグメント レッド 113、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 114、 CI. Pigment Red 112, C. I. Pigment Red 113, C. I. Pigment Red 114, C
. I.ビグメント レッド 122、 C. I.ビグメント レッド 123、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 144、 CI. Pigment Red 122, C. I. Pigment Red 123, C. I. Pigment Red 144, C
. I.ビグメント レッド 146、 C. I.ビグメント レッド 149、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 150、 CI. Pigment Red 146, C. I. Pigment Red 149, C. I. Pigment Red 150, C
. I.ビグメント レッド 151、 C. I.ビグメント レッド 166、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 168、 CI. Pigment Red 151, C. I. Pigment Red 166, C. I. Pigment Red 168, C
. I.ビグメント レッド 170、 C. I.ビグメント レッド 171、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 172、 CI. Pigment Red 170, C. I. Pigment Red 171, C. I. Pigment Red 172, C
. I.ビグメント レッド 174、 C. I.ビグメント レッド 175、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 176、 CI. Pigment Red 174, C. I. Pigment Red 175, C. I. Pigment Red 176, C
. I.ビグメント レッド 177、 C. I.ビグメント レッド 178、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 179、 CI. Pigment Red 177, C. I. Pigment Red 178, C. I. Pigment Red 179, C
. I.ビグメント レッド 180、 C. I.ビグメント レッド 185、 C. I.ビグメント ·レッド 187、 C I.ピグメント' 'レッド 188、 C. I.ピグメント' 'レッド 190、 C. I.ピグメント.レッド 193、 CI. Pigment Red 180, CI Pigment Red 185, CI Pigment Red 187, C I. Pigment '' Red 188, CI Pigment '' Red 190, CI Pigment. Red 193, C
I.ピグメント' 'レッド 194、 C. I.ピグメント' 'レッド 202、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 206、 CI. Pigment '' Red 194, C. I. Pigment '' Red 202, C. I. Pigment 'Red 206, C
I.ピグメント' 'レッド 207、 C. I.ピグメント' 'レッド 208、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 209、 CI. Pigment '' Red 207, C. I. Pigment '' Red 208, C. I. Pigment '' Red 209, C
I.ピグメント' 'レッド 215、 C. I.ピグメント' 'レッド 216、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 220、 CI. Pigment '' Red 215, C. I. Pigment '' Red 216, C. I. Pigment '' Red 220, C
I.ピグメント' 'レッド 224、 C. I.ピグメント' 'レッド 226、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 242、 CI. Pigment '' Red 224, C. I. Pigment '' Red 226, C. I. Pigment '' Red 242, C
I.ピグメント' 'レッド 243、 C. I.ピグメント' 'レッド 245、 C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 254、 CI. Pigment '' Red 243, C. I. Pigment '' Red 245, C. I. Pigment 'Red 254, C
I.ピグメント' 'レッド 255、 C. I.ピグメント' 'レッド 264、 C. I.ピグメン卜 'レッド 265 ; I. Pigment '' Red 255, C. I. Pigment '' Red 264, C. I. Pigment '' Red 265;
[0029] C. I.ビグメント ·ブルー 15、 C . I.ビグメント ·ブルー 15: 3、 C . I.ビグメント ·ブルー 1 [0029] C.I. pigment blue 15, C.I. pigment blue 15: 3, C.I. pigment blue 1
5 :4、 C. I.ビグメント 'ブルー 15 : 6、 C. I.ビグメント 'ブルー 60 ; 5: 4, C.I. pigment 'blue 15: 6, C.I. pigment' blue 60;
[0030] C. I.ビグメント 'グリーン 7、 C. I.ビグメント 'グリーン 36 ; [0030] C. I. Pigment 'Green 7, C. I. Pigment' Green 36;
C. I.ビグメント 'ブラウン 23、 C. I.ビグメント 'ブラウン 25 ;  C. I. Pigment 'Brown 23, C. I. Pigment' Brown 25;
C. I.ビグメント 'ブラック 1、 C. I.ビグメント 'ブラック 7 ;  C. I. Pigment 'Black 1, C. I. Pigment' Black 7;
、等が挙げられる。  , Etc.
[0031] 着色剤の中でも、(i)R (レッド)のインク組成物においては C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 25 4が好適であり、(ii) G (グリーン)のインク組成物においては C. I.ビグメント 'グリーン 36力 S好適であり、(iii) B (ブルー)のインク組成物においては C. I.ビグメント 'ブルー 15 : 6が好適である。  [0031] Among the colorants, (i) CI pigment 'Red 25 4 is preferred for the R (red) ink composition, and (ii) CI pigment' green 36 for the G (green) ink composition. Force S is preferred, and (iii) CI pigment 'Blue 15: 6 is preferred in the ink composition of B (Blue).
さらに、前記顔料は組み合わせて用いてもよい。  Further, the pigments may be used in combination.
[0032] 顔料を組み合わせて併用する場合、好ましい顔料の組み合わせは、前記 C. I.ピ グメント'レッド 254で ίま、 C. I.ピグメント ·レッド 177、 C. I.ピグメント ·レッド 224、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 139、又は C. I.ビグメント 'バイオレット 23との組み合わせが挙 げられ、前記 C. I.ビグメント 'グリーン 36では、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 150、 C. I. ビグメント 'イェロー 139、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 185、 C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 13 8、又は C. I.ビグメント 'イェロー 180との組み合わせが挙げられ、前記 C. I.ピグメ ント 'ブルー 15 : 6では、 C. I.ビグメント 'バイオレット 23、又は C. I.ビグメント 'ブル 一 60との組み合わせが挙げられる。  [0032] When pigments are used in combination, the preferred pigment combinations are CI Pigment 'Red 254, CI Pigment Red 177, CI Pigment Red 224, CI Pigment' Yellow 139, or CI Pigment ' In combination with Violet 23, CI Pigment 'Green 36, CI Pigment' Yellow 150, CI Pigment 'Yellow 139, CI Pigment' Yellow 185, CI Pigment 'Yellow 13 8, or CI Pigment' Yellow 180 ' In the CI Pigment 'Blue 15: 6, a combination with CI Pigment' Violet 23 or CI Pigment 'Blu 60 is mentioned.
[0033] 顔料を併用する場合、顔料中の C. I.ビグメント 'レッド 254、 C. I.ビグメント 'ダリー ン 36、又は C. I.ビグメント 'ブルー 15 : 6の各含有量としては、前記 C. I.ピグメント' レッド 254では、 80質量%以上が好ましぐ特に 90質量%以上が好ましい。前記 C. I .ビグメント 'グリーン 36では、 50質量%以上が好ましぐ特に 60質量%以上が好ま しい。また、前記 C. I.ビグメント 'ブルー 15 : 6では、 80質量%以上が好ましぐ特に 90質量%以上が好まし 、。 [0033] When the pigment is used in combination, the CI pigment 'Red 254, CI pigment' Dalene 36, or CI pigment 'Blue 15: 6 in the pigment contains the CI pigment' In Red 254, 80% by mass or more is preferable, particularly 90% by mass or more is preferable. In the C.I. Pigment 'Green 36, 50% by mass or more is preferable, and 60% by mass or more is particularly preferable. Also, in the CI pigment 'Blue 15: 6, 80% by mass or more is preferable, particularly 90% by mass or more is preferable.
[0034] 顔料は分散液として使用することが望ま 、。この分散液は、前記顔料と顔料分散 剤とを予め混合して得られる組成物を、後述する重合性化合物(又はビヒクルや溶剤 )に添加して分散させることによって調製することができる。前記顔料を分散させる際 に使用する分散機としては、特に制限はなぐ例えば「顔料の事典」(朝倉邦造著、第 一版、朝倉書店、 2000年、 438頁)に記載の、エーダー、ロールミル、アトライダー、 スーパーミル、ディゾルバ、ホモミキサー、サンドミル等の公知の分散機が挙げられる 。更に、「顔料の事典」の 310頁に記載の機械的摩砕により摩擦力を利用して微粉砕 してちよい。 [0034] The pigment is preferably used as a dispersion. This dispersion can be prepared by adding and dispersing a composition obtained by previously mixing the pigment and the pigment dispersant to a polymerizable compound (or vehicle or solvent) described later. There are no particular restrictions on the disperser used when dispersing the pigment. For example, the aider, roll mill, and the like described in “Encyclopedia of Pigments” (Asakura Kunizo, 1st edition, Asakura Shoten, 2000, p. 438) Well-known dispersers such as Atrider, Super Mill, Dissolver, Homomixer, and Sand Mill can be used. Further, the material may be finely pulverized using frictional force by mechanical grinding described on page 310 of “Encyclopedia of Pigments”.
[0035] 着色剤(顔料)の粒径は、数平均粒径で 0. 001-0. 1 μ mが好ましぐ更には 0. 0 1〜0. 08 μ mが好ましい。数平均粒径が前記範囲内であると、粒子表面エネルギー を低くして凝集が抑えられ、顔料分散を良好に行なえる。また、分散状態をより安定 に保つことができ、良好なコントラストが得られる。  The particle diameter of the colorant (pigment) is preferably 0.001 to 0.1 μm in terms of number average particle diameter, and more preferably 0.01 to 0.08 μm. When the number average particle diameter is within the above range, the particle surface energy is lowered, aggregation is suppressed, and pigment dispersion can be performed satisfactorily. In addition, the dispersion state can be kept more stable and good contrast can be obtained.
なお、「粒径」とは、電子顕微鏡写真画像の粒子をこれと同面積の円で表したときの 直径をいう。「数平均粒径」とは、粒子の粒径を求めて 100個の平均をとつた平均値 をいう。  “Particle size” refers to the diameter when particles in an electron micrograph image are represented by a circle having the same area. “Number average particle size” means an average value obtained by calculating the particle size of particles and taking the average of 100 particles.
[0036] 着色領域のコントラストは、分散されている顔料の粒径を小さくすることで向上させ ることができる。粒径を小さくするには、顔料分散物の分散時間を調節することで達 成できる。分散には、前記公知の分散機を用いることができる。  [0036] The contrast of the colored region can be improved by reducing the particle size of the dispersed pigment. Reducing the particle size can be achieved by adjusting the dispersion time of the pigment dispersion. For the dispersion, the known disperser can be used.
分散時間は、好ましくは 10〜30時間であり、更に好ましくは 18〜30時間、最も好 ましくは 24〜30時間である。分散時間が前記範囲内であると、顔料粒径が小さぐ良 好なコントラストが得られる。また、分散液の粘度上昇も抑えられ、インクジェットヘッド 力 の吐出を良好に行なえる。  The dispersion time is preferably 10 to 30 hours, more preferably 18 to 30 hours, and most preferably 24 to 30 hours. When the dispersion time is within the above range, a good contrast with a small pigment particle size can be obtained. In addition, an increase in the viscosity of the dispersion can be suppressed, and ink jet head force can be discharged well.
また、 2色以上の着色領域のコントラストの差は 600以内が好ましい。 600以内に調 整するには、顔料粒径を調節することが望ましい。 [0037] カラーフィルタを構成する各着色領域のコントラストは、 2000以上が好ましぐより 好ましくは 2800以上、更に好ましくは 3000以上であり、最も好ましくは 3400以上で ある。コントラストが前記範囲内であると、カラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示装置の画 像を観察したときに、画像全体に白っぽい印象がなぐ見やすい画像が得られる。 各着色領域のコントラストの差は、好ましくは 600以内であり、より好ましくは 410以 内であり、更に好ましくは 350以内であり、最も好ましくは 200以内である。コントラスト の差が 600以内であると、黒表示時における各着色領域部からの光漏れ量が大きく 相違しないため、黒表示の色バランスが良い。 Also, the difference in contrast between two or more colored areas is preferably within 600. In order to adjust within 600, it is desirable to adjust the pigment particle size. [0037] The contrast of each colored region constituting the color filter is preferably 2000 or more, more preferably 2800 or more, still more preferably 3000 or more, and most preferably 3400 or more. When the contrast is within the above range, an easy-to-see image with a whitish impression can be obtained when an image of a liquid crystal display device including a color filter is observed. The difference in contrast between the colored regions is preferably 600 or less, more preferably 410 or less, still more preferably 350 or less, and most preferably 200 or less. If the difference in contrast is within 600, the amount of light leakage from each colored area at the time of black display does not differ greatly, and the color balance of black display is good.
[0038] 前記「着色領域のコントラスト」とは、カラーフィルタを構成する R、 G、 Bにつ 、ての 色ごとに個別に評価されるコントラストを意味する。コントラストの測定は、次のように 行なえる。つまり、被測定物の両側に偏光板を重ねて偏光板の偏光方向を互いに平 行にした状態で、一方の偏光板の側からバックライトを当てて、他方の偏光板を通過 した光の輝度 Y1を測定する。さらに、偏光板を互いに直交させた状態で、一方の偏 光板の側からバックライトを当てて、他方の偏光板を通過した光の輝度 Y2を測定す る。得られた測定値を用いて Y1ZY2を算出する。  The “contrast of the colored region” means a contrast that is individually evaluated for each color of R, G, and B constituting the color filter. Contrast can be measured as follows. In other words, the brightness of light passing through the other polarizing plate with the backlight applied from the side of one polarizing plate with the polarizing plates overlapped on both sides of the object to be measured and the polarizing directions of the polarizing plates made parallel to each other Measure Y1. Further, with the polarizing plates orthogonal to each other, a backlight is applied from the side of one polarizing plate, and the luminance Y2 of the light passing through the other polarizing plate is measured. Y1ZY2 is calculated using the measured values obtained.
なお、コントラスト測定に用いる偏光板は、カラーフィルタを使用する液晶表示装置 に用いる偏光板と同一のものとする。  Note that the polarizing plate used for contrast measurement is the same as the polarizing plate used for a liquid crystal display device using a color filter.
[0039] 着色剤のインク組成物中における量は、所望の色相、濃度が得るために適宜選択 することができる力 好ましくはインク組成物の全質量に対し、 3. 0質量%以上が好ま しぐより好ましくは 5. 0質量%以上である。  [0039] The amount of the colorant in the ink composition is a force that can be appropriately selected in order to obtain a desired hue and density, and is preferably 3.0% by mass or more based on the total mass of the ink composition. More preferably, it is 5.0% by mass or more.
[0040] (フッ素系界面活性剤)  [0040] (Fluorosurfactant)
本発明のインク組成物は、フッ素系界面活性剤として、下記一般式 (a)で表される モノマーに由来の構成単位 aの少なくとも一つと、下記一般式 (b)で表されるモノマー に由来の構成単位 bの少なくとも一つとを有し、構成単位 aと構成単位 bとの質量比(a /h)が 20Z80〜60Z40である共重合体の少なくとも一種(以下、「本発明に係る 界面活性剤」ということがある。)を含有する。このフッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素含有 の高分子である。このフッ素系界面活性剤は、濃色離画壁で微細に区画されて離画 壁により取り囲まれた凹部にインクをインクジェット付与して形成されるインク面、すな わち着色領域の表面を平坦ィ匕することができる。 The ink composition of the present invention is derived from at least one of structural units a derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (a) and a monomer represented by the following general formula (b) as a fluorine-based surfactant. And at least one copolymer (hereinafter referred to as “surface activity according to the present invention”) having a mass ratio (a / h) of structural unit a to structural unit b of 20Z80 to 60Z40. "Sometimes referred to as an agent"). This fluorosurfactant is a fluorine-containing polymer. This fluorosurfactant is an ink surface formed by ink-jetting ink into a recess that is finely partitioned by a dark color separation wall and surrounded by the separation wall. That is, the surface of the colored region can be flattened.
[0041] [化 2]  [0041] [Chemical 2]
Figure imgf000014_0001
Figure imgf000014_0001
[0042] 一般式 (a)で表されるモノマー(以下、モノマー aとも 、う)につ 、て説明する。 [0042] The monomer represented by the general formula (a) (hereinafter, also referred to as monomer a) will be described.
一般式 (a)において、 R1は、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。また、一般式 (a)中の — C F は、直鎖でも分岐鎖でもよ!/、。 mは、 2〜 14の整数を表し、好ましくは 4〜 1 m 2m+l In the general formula (a), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. In general formula (a), —CF may be linear or branched! /. m represents an integer of 2 to 14, preferably 4 to 1 m 2m + l
2の整数である。 nは、 1〜18の整数を表し、好ましくは 2〜10である。  It is an integer of 2. n represents an integer of 1 to 18, preferably 2 to 10.
[0043] 前記 C F としては、例えば、 C F、 C F 、 C F などが挙げられる。 [0043] Examples of C F include C F, C F, and C F.
m 2m+l 4 9 6 13 12 25  m 2m + l 4 9 6 13 12 25
[0044] 前記—C F の割合は、モノマー aの全体の質量に対し、 20〜70質量%が好まし m 2m+l  [0044] The proportion of -C F is preferably 20 to 70% by mass with respect to the total mass of the monomer a m 2m + l
ぐ特に好ましくは 40〜60質量%である。  Particularly preferred is 40 to 60% by mass.
[0045] 前記モノマー aのうち、 R1が水素原子であって、—C F が C F であって、 nが 2で m 2m+l 6 13 [0045] Among the monomers a, R 1 is a hydrogen atom, -CF is CF, n is 2 and m 2m + l 6 13
ある化合物が特に好ましい。  Certain compounds are particularly preferred.
[0046] 一般式 (b)で表されるモノマー(以下、モノマー bとも 、う)につ 、て説明する。 [0046] The monomer represented by the general formula (b) (hereinafter, also referred to as monomer b) will be described.
一般式 (b)において、 R2及び R3は各々独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、 R4 は水素原子又は炭素数 1〜5のアルキル基を表す。 p及び qは各々独立に、 0〜18の 整数を表し、 pと qとが同時に 0 (ゼロ)を表すことはない。 p及び qは、好ましくは 2〜8 である。 In the general formula (b), R 2 and R 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. p and q each independently represent an integer of 0 to 18, and p and q do not represent 0 (zero) at the same time. p and q are preferably 2-8.
[0047] 前記 R4で表される炭素数 1〜5のアルキル基としては、メチル基、ェチル基が好まし い。 [0047] The alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms represented by R 4 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
[0048] 前記モノマー bのうち、 R2が水素原子であって、 R3力メチル基であって、 R4が水素原 子であって、 pが 7であって、 qが 0である化合物や、 R2が水素原子であって、 R3が水 素原子であって、 R4が水素原子であって、 pが 0であって、 qが 7である化合物が特に 好ましい。 [0048] Among the monomers b, a compound wherein R 2 is a hydrogen atom, an R 3 force methyl group, R 4 is a hydrogen atom, p is 7, and q is 0 Or a compound in which R 2 is a hydrogen atom, R 3 is a hydrogen atom, R 4 is a hydrogen atom, p is 0, and q is 7. preferable.
[0049] 本発明に係る界面活性剤 1分子中に含まれるモノマー aとしては、互いに構造の同 じ一種のみでもよいし、互いに構造の異なる複数種を用いてもよい。モノマー bにつ いても同様である。  [0049] As the monomer a contained in one molecule of the surfactant according to the present invention, only one type having the same structure may be used, or a plurality of types having different structures may be used. The same applies to monomer b.
[0050] 本発明に係る界面活性剤の質量平均分子量 Mwは、 1000〜40000力 S好ましく、 5 000〜30000力より好まし!/ヽ。  [0050] The weight average molecular weight Mw of the surfactant according to the present invention is preferably 1000 to 40000 force S, more preferably 5 000 to 30000 force! / ヽ.
[0051] 本発明に係る界面活性剤は、上記のように、前記モノマー aと前記モノマー bとを少 なくとも共重合してなる共重合体であり、共重合体中におけるモノマー aZモノマー b 比 (質量比)を 20Z80〜60Z40とする。共重合比が前記範囲内であると、濃色離画 壁で微細に区画されて離画壁により取り囲まれた凹部に離画壁の壁高よりも高く盛り 上がるようにインクジェット付与して乾燥させた場合に、インク上面、すなわち着色画 素となる着色領域の表面を平坦ィ匕でき、特に濃色離画壁近傍の平坦性を向上させる のに有効である。  [0051] As described above, the surfactant according to the present invention is a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing at least the monomer a and the monomer b, and the ratio of the monomer aZ monomer b in the copolymer is as follows. The (mass ratio) is 20Z80-60Z40. When the copolymerization ratio is within the above range, the ink is applied and dried so as to rise above the wall height of the separation wall in the concave portion that is finely divided by the dark separation wall and surrounded by the separation wall. In this case, the upper surface of the ink, that is, the surface of the colored region to be a colored pixel can be flattened, and this is particularly effective for improving the flatness near the dark color separation wall.
[0052] 本発明に係る界面活性剤は、上記のモノマー a及び bと共に、その他の任意モノマ 一を共重合させた共重合体も好適である。この場合、モノマー a、 b以外の共重合可 能な他の任意モノマーとしては、例えば、スチレン、ビュルトルエン、 α—メチルスチ レン、 2—メチルスチレン、クロルスチレン、ビュル安息香酸、ビュルベンゼンスルホン 酸ソーダ、アミノスチレン等のスチレン及びその誘導体、置換体、ブタジエン、イソプ レン等のジェン類、アクリロニトリル、ビュルエーテル類、メタクリル酸、アクリル酸、イタ コン酸、クロトン酸、マレイン酸、部分エステル化マレイン酸、スチレンスルホン酸無水 マレイン酸、ケィ皮酸、塩化ビニル、酢酸ビニル等のビュル系単量体等が挙げられる  [0052] The surfactant according to the present invention is also preferably a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing the above-mentioned monomers a and b with other optional monomers. In this case, other optional monomers that can be copolymerized in addition to monomers a and b include, for example, styrene, butyltoluene, α-methylstyrene, 2-methylstyrene, chlorostyrene, butylbenzoic acid, and sodium benzenebenzene sulfonate. Styrene such as aminostyrene and derivatives thereof, substituted products, gens such as butadiene and isoprene, acrylonitrile, butyl ethers, methacrylic acid, acrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, partially esterified maleic acid, Styrene sulfonic anhydride Maleic acid, kain cinnamate, vinyl chloride, vinyl acetate, etc.
[0053] 例えば、本発明に係る界面活性剤が 100質量部である場合、モノマー a20〜60質 量部とモノマー b80〜40質量部と力もなる 2元もしくは 3元以上の共重合体、モノマ 一 a20〜60質量部と、モノマー b80〜40質量部と、その他の任意モノマー(残りの質 量分)とからなる 3元以上の共重合体が好ましい。 [0053] For example, when the surfactant according to the present invention is 100 parts by mass, a copolymer of a binary or ternary or monomer having a force of 20 to 60 parts by mass of monomer a and 80 to 40 parts by mass of monomer b, monomer A ternary or higher copolymer consisting of a20 to 60 parts by mass, monomers b80 to 40 parts by mass, and other optional monomers (remaining mass) is preferred.
更には、モノマー a25〜60質量部とモノマー b60〜40質量部とからなる 2元もしく は 3元以上の共重合体、モノマー a25〜60質量部と、モノマー b60〜40質量部と、 その他の任意モノマー (残りの質量分)とからなる 3元以上の共重合体が好まし 、。 Furthermore, a binary or ternary or higher copolymer consisting of 25 to 60 parts by weight of monomer a and 60 to 40 parts by weight of monomer b, 25 to 60 parts by weight of monomer a, 60 to 40 parts by weight of monomer b, A ternary or higher copolymer consisting of other optional monomers (remaining mass) is preferred.
[0054] 本発明に係る界面活性剤は、モノマー a、モノマー bを少なくとも共重合してなる共 重合体であり、そのモノマー配列に特に制限はなぐランダム共重合でも、規則的な 例えばブロック共重合、グラフト共重合の 、ずれであってもよ!/、。 [0054] The surfactant according to the present invention is a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing at least the monomer a and the monomer b, and regular random block copolymerization, for example, block copolymerization is not particularly limited. Even if the graft copolymer is out of alignment! /.
[0055] 本発明に係る界面活性剤は、分子構造及び Z又はモノマー組成の異なるものを 2 以上混合して用いることができる。 [0055] As the surfactant according to the present invention, two or more surfactants having different molecular structures and different Z or monomer compositions can be used.
[0056] 以下、本発明に係る界面活性剤の具体例(例示化合物 Νο.1〜Νο.16)を示す。伹 し、本発明においては、これらに制限されるものではない。 [0056] Specific examples of the surfactants according to the present invention (exemplary compounds Νο.1 to Νο.16) are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
[0057] [化 3] フッ素系界面活性剤 [0057] [Chemical 3] Fluorosurfactant
モノマー a モノマー b1 モノマ一 b2 Monomer a Monomer b 1 Monomer b 2
共霣合比 質量平均 Common ratio Mass average
=a : b1 :b2 分子量= a: b 1 : b 2 Molecular weight
No. R1 m n 3 R4 P q R2 3 R4 P q No. R 1 mn 3 R 4 P q R 2 3 R 4 P q
1 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 300001 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000
2 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:40:20 300002 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40:40:20 30000
3 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 一 40:60:0 300003 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 One 40: 60: 0 30000
4 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 25:60:15 300004 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 25:60:15 30000
5 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 60:25:15 300005 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 60:25:15 30000
6 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 50006 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 5000
7 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 300007 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000
8 H 6 2 H CH3 H 6 1 - 40:60:0 300008 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 6 1-40: 60: 0 30000
9 H 6 2 H CH3 H 1 6 ― 40:60:0 300009 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 1 6 ― 40: 60: 0 30000
10 CH3 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 3000010 CH 3 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000
11 H 6 2 H CH3 CH3 フ 0 H H CH3 0 7 40:55:5 3000011 H 6 2 H CH 3 CH 3 0 HH CH 3 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000
12 H 6 2 CH3 CH3 H フ 0 CH3 H H 0 7 40:55:5 3000012 H 6 2 CH 3 CH 3 H F 0 CH 3 HH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000
13 H 12 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 3000013 H 12 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000
14 H 4 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 3000014 H 4 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000
15 H 6 2 H CH3 H 14 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 3000015 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 14 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000
16 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 14 40:55:5 30000 [0058] 本発明に係る界面活性剤のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物中における 含有量としては、インク全質量の 0. 01-0. 2質量%が好ましぐ 0. 05-0. 15質量 %がより好ましい。該含有量が前記範囲内であると、インクを濃色離画壁間にインク ジェット付与して着色パターンを形成したときのパターン表面の平坦性を向上させ得16 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 14 40: 55: 5 30000 [0058] The content of the surfactant according to the present invention in the ink composition for an inkjet color filter is preferably 0.01 to 0.2% by mass of the total mass of the ink. % Is more preferable. When the content is within the above range, it is possible to improve the flatness of the pattern surface when an ink jet is applied between the dark color separation walls to form a colored pattern.
、ひいては画像表示した際の画像中の表示ムラの発生を防止することができる。 As a result, it is possible to prevent display unevenness in the image when the image is displayed.
[0059] (重合性化合物)  [0059] (Polymerizable compound)
重合性化合物は、ラジカル活性種による重合反応により硬化するラジカル重合性 化合物、及びカチオン活性種によるカチオン重合反応により硬化するカチオン重合 性ィ匕合物を用いることができる。  As the polymerizable compound, a radical polymerizable compound that is cured by a polymerization reaction with a radical active species and a cationic polymerizable compound that is cured by a cationic polymerization reaction with a cationic active species can be used.
本発明のインク組成物は、前記ラジカル重合性ィ匕合物を用いた場合はラジカル重 合性組成物に構成することができる。本発明のインク組成物は、カチオン重合性化合 物を用いた場合はカチオン重合性組成物に構成することができる。これらのいずれ の構成も好適である。  The ink composition of the present invention can be formed into a radical polymerizable composition when the radical polymerizable compound is used. The ink composition of the present invention can be formed into a cationically polymerizable composition when a cationically polymerizable compound is used. Any of these configurations is suitable.
[0060] ラジカル重合性化合物  [0060] Radical polymerizable compound
ラジカル重合性ィ匕合物としては、具体的には、以下に示すィ匕合物が挙げられるが、 これらに限定されるものではない。ラジカル重合性ィ匕合物には、単官能モノマー及び 、 2官能以上のモノマー、オリゴマーが含まれる。  Specific examples of the radical polymerizable compound include, but are not limited to, the following compounds. The radical polymerizable compound includes a monofunctional monomer, a bifunctional or higher monomer, and an oligomer.
[0061] 単官能モノマーは、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を 1個有するものである。例えば、 ブタンジオールモノアタリレート、 N, N ジメチルアミノエチルアタリレート、 2—ヒドロ キシェチルアタリレート、 2—ヒドロキシェチルメタタリレート、ヒドロキシプロピルアタリレ ート、 2—メトキシェチルアタリレート、 N—ビュル力プロラタタム、 N ビニルピロリドン 、アタリロイルモルフォリン、 N—ビュルホルムアミド、シクロへキシルアタリレート、シク 口へキシノレメタタリレート、ジシクロペンタ-ノレメタタリレート、グリシジルアタリレート、ィ ソボ-ルアタリレート、イソデシルアタリレート、フエノキシメタタリレート、ステアリルァク リレート、テトラヒドロフルフリルアタリレート、 2—フエノキシェチルアタリレート、 2—ヒド ロキシプロピルアタリレート、 4ーヒドロキシブチルアタリレート、イソブチルアタリレート 、 t—ブチルアタリレート、イソォクチルアタリレート、イソボル-ルアタリレート、メトキシ トリエチレングリコールアタリレート、 2—エトキシェチルアタリレート、テトラヒドロフルフ リルアタリレート、 3—メトキシブチルアタリレート、ベンジルアタリレート、エトキシェトキ シェチルアタリレート、ブトキシェチルアタリレート、エトキシジエチレングリコールァク リレート、メトキシジプロピレングリコールアタリレート、メチルフエノキシェチルアタリレ ート、ジプロピレングリコールアタリレート等が挙げられる。 [0061] The monofunctional monomer has one ethylenically unsaturated double bond. For example, butanediol monoacrylate, N, N dimethylaminoethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, hydroxypropyl acrylate, 2-methoxyethyl acrylate N-Bull Force Prolatatam, N Vinylpyrrolidone, Ataliloyl Morpholine, N-Burformamide, Cyclohexyl Atalylate, Cyclic Hexinoremetatalylate, Dicyclopenta-Nolemetatalylate, Glycidyl Atalylate Rate, isodecyl acrylate, phenoxymetatalylate, stearyl acrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl acrylate, 2-phenoxychetyl acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate Butyl Atari rate, t- butyl Atari rate, isobutyl O Chi le Atari rate, Isoboru - Le Atari rate, methoxy triethylene glycol Atari rate, 2-ethoxy E chill Atari rate, tetrahydropyran Acquisition of full Ril attalylate, 3-methoxybutyl acrylate, benzyl acrylate, ethoxyethyl cetyl acrylate, butoxy catechol acrylate, ethoxydiethylene glycol acrylate, methoxydipropylene glycol acrylate, methyl phenoxy acetyl acrylate Examples include dipropylene glycol acrylate.
[0062] 前記 2官能以上のモノマー、オリゴマーとしては、例えば、エチレングリコールジ (メ タ)アタリレート、ジエチレングリコールジ (メタ)アタリレート、ポリエチレングリコールジ( メタ)アタリレート、 1, 6 へキサンジオールジ (メタ)アタリレート、エトキシ化 1, 6 へ キサンジオールジアタリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アタリレート、エトキシ 化ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アタリレート、プロポキシ化ネオペンチルグリコー ルジ(メタ)アタリレート、トリプロピレングリコールジ (メタ)アタリレート、ポリプロピレング リコールジアタリレート、 1, 4 ブタンジオールジ (メタ)アタリレート、 1, 9ーノナンジォ ールジアタリレート、テトラエチレングリコールジアタリレート、 2— n—ブチルー 2—ェ チルー 1, 3 プロパンジオールジアタリレート、ジメチロールートリシクロデカンジァク リレート、ヒドロキシピバリン酸ネオペンチルグリコールジアタリレート、 1, 3 ブチレン グリコールジ (メタ)アタリレート、エトキシ化ビスフエノール Aジ (メタ)アタリレート、プロ ポキシ化ビスフエノール Aジ (メタ)アタリレート、シクロへキサンジメタノールジ (メタ)ァ タリレート、ジメチロールジシクロペンタンジアタリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリァク リレート、エトキシ化トリメチロールプロパントリアタリレート、プロポキシ化トリメチロール プロパントリアタリレート、 [0062] Examples of the bifunctional or higher functional monomers and oligomers include ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, diethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, 1, 6 hexanediol di (Meth) acrylate, ethoxylated 1,6 hexanediol ditalate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, ethoxylated neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, propoxylated neopentyl glycol di (meth) attaly , Tripropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol diathalate, 1,4 butanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonandi dialate, tetraethylene glycol dialate —Butyl 2— Thirul 1,3 propanediol ditalylate, dimethylol-tricyclodecane diacrylate, hydroxypivalic acid neopentylglycol ditalylate, 1,3 butylene glycol di (meth) atalylate, ethoxylated bisphenol A di ( (Meth) acrylate, propoxylated bisphenol A di (meth) acrylate, cyclohexane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, dimethylol dicyclopentane diathalate, trimethylol propane triacrylate, ethoxylated trimethylol Propane tritalylate, propoxylated trimethylol Propane tritalylate,
[0063] ペンタエリスリトールトリアタリレート、テトラメチロールプロパントリアタリレート、テトラメ チロールメタントリアタリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアタリレート、力プロラタトン変 性トリメチロールプロパントリアタリレート、エトキシ化イソシァヌール酸トリアタリレート、 トリ(2—ヒドロキシェチルイソシァヌレート)トリアタリレー、プロポキシレートグリセリルト リアタリレート、テトラメチロールメタンテトラアタリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラァク リレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラアタリレート、エトキシ化ペンタエリスリトールテ トラアタリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールへキサアタリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールォ リゴアタリレート、 1, 4 ブタンジオールオリゴアタリレート、 1, 6 へキサンジオール オリゴアタリレート、トリメチロールプロパンオリゴアタリレート、ペンタエリスリトールオリ ゴアタリレート、ウレタンアタリレート、エポキシアタリレート、ポリエステルアタリレート等 が挙げられる。 [0063] pentaerythritol triatalylate, tetramethylolpropane tritalylate, tetramethylol methane tritalylate, pentaerythritol tetratalylate, force prolatatone modified trimethylolpropane tritalylate, ethoxylated isocyanuric acid triatalylate, tri ( 2-Hydroxyethylisocyanurate) triatareyl, propoxylate glyceryl riatalylate, tetramethylol methane tetraatarylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetraatalylate, ethoxylated pentaerythritol tetraatalylate Hexaatalylate, Neopentyl glycolo Rigoatarylate, 1, 4 Butanediol oligoattaryl DOO, 1, 6 hexane diol oligo Atari rate, trimethylolpropane oligo Atari rate, pentaerythritol cage Examples include goat acrylate, urethane acrylate, epoxy acrylate, and polyester acrylate.
これら化合物は、一種又は必要に応じて二種以上用いてもょ 、。  These compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more as required.
[0064] 一力チオン重合性化合物  [0064] One force thione polymerizable compound
カチオン重合性ィ匕合物は、光重合開始剤カゝら発生されるカチオン活性種により重 合反応を生起し、硬化する化合物である。  The cationically polymerizable compound is a compound that cures by causing a polymerization reaction by the cationic active species generated from the photopolymerization initiator.
カチオン重合性ィ匕合物としては、光力チオン重合性モノマーとして知られる各種公 知のカチオン重合性のモノマーが挙げられる。例えば、特開平 6— 9714号、特開 20 01— 31892号、同 2001— 40068号、同 2001— 55507号、同 2001— 310938号 、同 2001— 310937号、同 2001— 220526号などの各公報に記載の、ビュルエー テル化合物、ォキセタンィ匕合物、ォキシランィ匕合物などが挙げられる。  Examples of the cationically polymerizable compound include various known cationically polymerizable monomers known as photopower thione polymerizable monomers. For example, JP-A-6-9714, JP-A-2001-31892, 2001-40068, 2001-55507, 2001-310938, 2001-310937, 2001-220526, etc. And bule ether compounds, oxetane compounds, oxsilani compounds and the like.
[0065] ビュルエーテルを官能基に有するカチオン重合性ィ匕合物として、例えば、ウレタン 系ビュルエーテル(ビュルエーテルウレタン)、エステル系ビュルエーテルなどが挙げ られる。これらのオリゴマーは単独で又は混合して使用することができる。  [0065] Examples of the cationically polymerizable compound having a bull ether as a functional group include urethane bull ether (bull ether urethane) and ester bull ether. These oligomers can be used alone or in combination.
[0066] また、芳香族エポキシ榭脂の具体例として、少なくとも 1個の芳香族環を有する多価 フエノール、又はそのアルキレンオキサイド付カ卩物のポリグリシジルエーテル、例えば ビスフエノール A、ビスフエノール F、またこれらに更にアルキレンオキサイドを付カロさ せた化合物のグリシジルエーテル、エポキシノボラック榭脂、ビスフエノール Aノボラッ クジグリシジルエーテル、ビスフエノール Fノボラックジグリシジルエーテル等が挙げら れる。 [0066] Further, as specific examples of the aromatic epoxy resin, polyvalent phenol having at least one aromatic ring, or polyglycidyl ether of alkylene oxide-attached product thereof, such as bisphenol A, bisphenol F, Further, glycidyl ether, epoxy novolac resin, bisphenol A novolak diglycidyl ether, bisphenol F novolac diglycidyl ether, and the like, which are further carotenated with alkylene oxide, can be mentioned.
また、脂環式エポキシ榭脂の具体例として、少なくとも 1個の脂環式環を有する多価 アルコールのポリグリシジルエーテル又はシクロへキセン、シクロペンテン環含有化 合物を酸化剤でエポキシィ匕することによって得られるシクロへキセンオキサイド構造 含有化合物又は、シクロペンテンオキサイド構造含有ィ匕合物、又はビニルシクロへキ サン構造を有する化合物を酸化剤でエポキシィ匕することによって得られるビニルシク 口へキサンオキサイド構造含有ィ匕合物が挙げられる。例えば、水素添加ビスフエノー ノレ Aジグリシジノレエーテノレ、 3, 4 エポキシシクロへキシノレメチノレー 3, 4—エポキシ シクロへキシルカルボキシレート、 3, 4 エポキシ 1ーメチルシクロへキシルー 3, 4 エポキシ 1ーメチルシクロへキサンカルボキシレート、 6—メチルー 3, 4 ェポキ シシクロへキシルメチルー 6—メチルー 3, 4—エポキシシクロへキサンカルボキシレ ート、 3, 4 エポキシー3—メチルシクロへキシルメチルー 3, 4—エポキシー3—メチ ルシクロへキサンカルボキシレート、 3, 4 エポキシ 5—メチルシクロへキシルメチ ノレ 3, 4 エポキシー5—メチノレシクロへキサン力ノレボキシレート、 2- (3, 4ーェポ キシシクロへキシルー 5, 5—スピロ 3, 4—エポキシ)シクロへキサン メタジォキサ ン、ビス(3, 4—エポキシシクロへキシルメチル)アジペート、ビュルシクロへキセンジ オキサイド、 4 ビニルエポキシシクロへキサン、ビス(3, 4—エポキシ 6—メチルシ クロへキシルメチル)アジペート、 3, 4 エポキシー6—メチルシクロへキシルカルボ キシレート、メチレンビス(3, 4—エポキシシクロへキサン)、ジシクロペンタジェンジェ ポキサイド、エチレングリコールジ(3, 4—エポキシシクロへキシルメチル)エーテル、 エチレンビス(3, 4—エポキシシクロへキサンカルボキシレート)、エポキシへキサヒド ロフタル酸ジォクチル、エポキシへキサヒドロフタル酸ジ 2—ェチルへキシル等が挙 げられる。 As a specific example of alicyclic epoxy resin, polyglycidyl ether of polyhydric alcohol having at least one alicyclic ring or cyclohexene, cyclopentene ring-containing compound is epoxidized with an oxidizing agent. The resulting cyclohexene oxide structure-containing compound, cyclopentene oxide structure-containing compound, or vinyl cyclohexane structure-containing compound obtained by epoxidizing a compound having a vinylcyclohexane structure with an oxidizing agent. Things. For example, hydrogenated bisphenol nore A diglycidinoreethenole, 3, 4 epoxycyclohexenoremethinolere 3, 4-epoxy cyclohexyl carboxylate, 3, 4 epoxy 1-methylcyclohexyl luo 3, 4 Epoxy 1-Methylcyclohexanecarboxylate, 6-Methyl-3,4 Epoxycyclohexylmethyl-6-Methyl-3,4-Epoxycyclohexanecarboxylate, 3, 4 Epoxy-3-Methylcyclohexylmethyl-3,4-Epoxy-3— Methylcyclohexanecarboxylate, 3, 4 Epoxy 5—Methylcyclohexylmethylol 3,4 Epoxy 5-—Methylenocyclohexyl hexanolate, 2- (3,4-epoxycyclohexylene 5,5-spiro 3,4-epoxy) Cyclohexane metadioxane, bis (3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl) adipate, butylcyclohexene dioxide, 4 vinyl epoxycyclohexane, bis (3,4-epoxy 6-methylcyclohexylmethyl) adipate, 3, 4 Epoxy 6-methylcyclohexyl Ruruboxylate, methylenebis (3,4-epoxycyclohexane), dicyclopentadiene oxide, ethylene glycol di (3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl) ether, ethylenebis (3,4-epoxycyclohexanecarboxylate) ), Dioctyl epoxyhexahydrophthalate, di-2-ethylhexyl epoxyhexahydrophthalate, and the like.
脂肪族エポキシ榭脂の具体例として、脂肪族多価アルコール又はそのアルキレン オキサイド付加物のポリグリシジルエーテル、脂肪族長鎖多塩基酸のポリグリシジル エステル、脂肪族長鎖不飽和炭化水素を酸化剤で酸化することによって得られるェ ポキシ含有化合物、グリシジルアタリレート又はグリシジルメタタリレートのホモポリマ 一、グリシジルアタリレート又はグリシジルメタタリレートのコポリマー等が挙げられる。 代表的な化合物として、 1, 4 ブタンジオールジグリシジルエーテル、 1, 6 へキサ ンジオールジグリシジルエーテル、グリセリンのトリグリシジルエーテル、トリメチロール プロパンのトリグリシジルエーテル、ペンタエリスリトールのテトラグリシジルエーテル、 ソルビトールのテトラグリシジルエーテル、ジペンタエルスリトールのへキサグリシジル エーテル、ポリエチレングリコーノレのジグリシジノレエーテル、ポリプロピレングリコーノレ のジグリシジルエーテルなどの多価アルコールのグリシジルエーテル、また、プロピレ ングリコール,グリセリン等の脂肪族多価アルコールに 1種又は 2種以上のアルキレン オキサイドを付加することによって得られるポリエーテルポリオールのポリグリシジルェ 一テル、脂肪族長鎖二塩基酸のジグリシジルエステルが挙げられる。さらに、脂肪族 高級アルコールのモノグリシジルエーテルやフエノール,クレゾール,ブチルフエノー ル、またこれらにアルキレンオキサイドを付加することによって得られるポリエーテルァ ルコールのモノグリシジルエーテル、高級脂肪酸のグリシジルエステル、エポキシィ匕 大豆油、エポキシステアリン酸オタチル、エポキシステアリン酸プチル、エポキシ化ァ マ二油等が挙げられる。 As specific examples of aliphatic epoxy resin, polyglycidyl ether of aliphatic polyhydric alcohol or its alkylene oxide adduct, polyglycidyl ester of aliphatic long-chain polybasic acid, and aliphatic long-chain unsaturated hydrocarbon are oxidized with an oxidizing agent. Examples thereof include epoxy-containing compounds, glycidyl acrylate or homopolymer of glycidyl methacrylate, copolymers of glycidyl acrylate or glycidyl methacrylate. Representative compounds include 1,4 butanediol diglycidyl ether, 1,6 hexanediol diglycidyl ether, glycerin triglycidyl ether, trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether, pentaerythritol tetraglycidyl ether, sorbitol tetraglyceride. Polyglycol glycidyl ethers such as glycidyl ether, dipentaerythritol hexaglycidyl ether, polyethylene glycolanol diglycidinole ether, polypropylene glycolanol diglycidyl ether, and aliphatics such as propylene glycol and glycerin Polyglycidyl ether of polyether polyol obtained by adding one or more alkylene oxides to polyhydric alcohol, aliphatic long-chain dibasic Like diglycidyl ester of. In addition, aliphatic Monoglycidyl ethers of higher alcohols, phenol, cresol, butylphenol, polyether alcohol monoglycidyl ethers obtained by adding alkylene oxides to these, glycidyl esters of higher fatty acids, epoxy soybean oil, epoxy stagyl stearate, epoxy Examples thereof include butyl stearate and epoxidized rubber oil.
[0068] 重合性ィ匕合物のインク組成物中における量は、インク組成物の全質量に対して、 5 0質量%以上が好ましぐより好ましくは 60質量%以上である。重合性化合物が前記 範囲内であると、一般的な活性エネルギー線の強度で硬化性を満足することができ 、照射時間を長くするなどの必要もない。  [0068] The amount of the polymerizable compound in the ink composition is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 60% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the ink composition. When the polymerizable compound is within the above range, the curability can be satisfied with the intensity of a general active energy ray, and it is not necessary to lengthen the irradiation time.
[0069] (重合開始剤)  [0069] (Polymerization initiator)
本発明に用いられる重合開始剤としては、活性エネルギー線の照射により、ラジカ ル活性種を発生し、ラジカル重合性ィ匕合物の重合を開始するラジカル重合開始剤、 及び、カチオン活性種を発生し、カチオン重合性ィ匕合物の重合を開始するカチオン 重合開始剤のいずれをも重合性ィ匕合物に合わせて用いることができる。  The polymerization initiator used in the present invention generates radically active species upon irradiation with active energy rays, and generates a radical polymerization initiator that initiates polymerization of a radical polymerizable compound, and a cationically active species. Any cationic polymerization initiator that initiates polymerization of the cationic polymerizable compound can be used in accordance with the polymerizable compound.
[0070] ラジカル重合開始剤  [0070] Radical polymerization initiator
ラジカル重合開始剤としては以下のものが挙げられる。例えば、ベンゾフエノン系と して、ベンゾフエノン、ベンゾィル安息香酸、 4—フエ-ルペンゾフエノン、 4, 4—ジェ チルァミノべンゾフエノン、 3, 3'—ジメチルー 4—メトキシベンゾフエノン、 4—ベンゾィ ルー 4'ーメチルジフエ-ルサルファイド等が挙げられる。チォキサントン系として、チ ォキサントン、 2 クロロォキサントン、 2、 4 ジェチルチオキサントン、 1 クロロー 4 プロポキシチォキサントン、イソプロピルキサントン等が挙げられる。ァセトフエノン 系として、 2—メチルー 1一(4ーメチルチオ)フエ-ルー 2 モルフォリノプロパン 1 —オン、 2—ベンジル一 2—ジメチルァミノ一 1— (4—モルフォリノフエ-ル)一ブタノ ン一 1、 2—ヒドロキシ一 2—メチル 1—フエ-ルプロパン一 1—オン、 1—ヒドロキシ シクロへキシルフェニルケトン、 2, 2—ジメチルー 2—ヒドロキシァセトフエノン、 2, 2- ジメトキシー 2 フエニルァセトフエノン、 4ーフエノキシジクロロアセトフエノン、ジエト キシァセトフエノン、 1—ヒドロキシシクロへキシルフエ-ルケトン等が挙げられる。ベン ゾイン系として、ベンゾインメチルエーテル、ベンゾインイソブチルエーテル、ベンジ ルメチルケタール等が挙げられる。ァシルフォスフィンオキサイド系として、 2, 4, 6— トリメチルベンゾィルジフエ-ルホスフィンオキサイド、ビス(2, 4, 6 トリメチルベンゾ ィル)ァシルフォスフィンオキサイド等が挙げられる。 Examples of the radical polymerization initiator include the following. For example, the benzophenone series includes benzophenone, benzoylbenzoic acid, 4-phenol-penzophenone, 4,4-jetylaminobenzophenone, 3,3'-dimethyl-4-methoxybenzophenone, 4-benzoyl 4'-methyldiphen- Rusulfide etc. are mentioned. Examples of thixanthone include thixanthone, 2 chloroxanthone, 2, 4 jetylthioxanthone, 1 chloro-4 propoxythixanthone, isopropyl xanthone, and the like. As the acetophenone system, 2-methyl-1-mono (4-methylthio) phenol- 2-morpholinopropane 1-one, 2-benzyl-1-2-dimethylamino-1-(4-morpholinophenol) -butanone 1, 2 —Hydroxy-2-methyl 1-phenolpropane 1-one, 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone, 2,2-dimethyl-2-hydroxyacetophenone, 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone, 4 -Phenoxydichloroacetophenone, diethylacetophenone, 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenol ketone and the like. As benzoin series, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin isobutyl ether, benzine And rumethyl ketal. Examples of the acylphosphine oxide include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyldiphenylphosphine oxide, bis (2,4,6 trimethylbenzoyl) acylphosphine oxide, and the like.
[0071] 一力チオン重合開始剤 [0071] One force thione polymerization initiator
カチオン重合開始剤としては、例えば、ジァゾニゥム塩、ョードニゥム塩、スルホユウ ム塩、鉄アレーン錯体、及び有機ポリハロゲンィ匕合物が好ましい。ジァゾ -ゥム塩、ョ 一ドニゥム塩、及びスルホ -ゥム塩としては、特公昭 54— 14277号公報、特公昭 54 — 14278号公報、特開昭 51— 56885号公報、米国特許第 3, 70 8, 296号明細書 、同第 3, 853, 002号明細書等に記載の化合物が挙げられる。  As the cationic polymerization initiator, for example, a diazonium salt, an iodine salt, a sulfonium salt, an iron arene complex, and an organic polyhalogen compound are preferable. Examples of diazo-um salt, monodonium salt, and sulfo-um salt are JP-B 54-14277, JP-B 54-14278, JP-A 51-56885, US Pat. 70, 296 specification, 3,853, 002 specification etc. are mentioned.
また、光力チオン重合開始剤として、例えば、芳香族ジァゾ -ゥム塩、芳香族スルホ -ゥム塩、芳香族ョードニゥム塩、メタ口センィ匕合物、ケィ素化合物 Zアルミニウム錯 体等が挙げられる。  Examples of the light-power thione polymerization initiator include aromatic diazo-um salt, aromatic sulfo-um salt, aromatic ododonium salt, meta-oxycene compound, and key compound Z aluminum complex. It is done.
[0072] 重合開始剤のインク組成物中における量は、前記重合性化合物(質量)に対して 5 〜60質量%が好ましぐより好ましくは 10〜50質量%である。重合開始剤が前記範 囲内であると、一般的な活性エネルギー線の強度で硬化性を満足することができ、 照射時間を長くするなどの必要もない。  [0072] The amount of the polymerization initiator in the ink composition is preferably 5 to 60% by mass, more preferably 10 to 50% by mass with respect to the polymerizable compound (mass). When the polymerization initiator is within the above range, the curability can be satisfied with the intensity of a general active energy ray, and it is not necessary to lengthen the irradiation time.
[0073] (溶剤)  [0073] (Solvent)
本発明のインク組成物は、上記成分以外に、溶剤を用いて構成することができる。 溶剤を含有すると、インクジェット法で打滴するのに適度な流動性を付与できると共 に、既述の本発明に係る界面活性剤による平坦性の形成に有効である。溶剤の量は 、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で適宜選択することができる。  The ink composition of the present invention can be constituted using a solvent in addition to the above components. When a solvent is contained, an appropriate fluidity can be imparted for droplet ejection by the ink jet method, and it is effective for the formation of flatness by the surfactant according to the present invention described above. The amount of the solvent can be appropriately selected within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention.
[0074] 本発明における溶剤とは、本発明のインク組成物に含まれる着色剤、重合性モノマ 一、添加剤、ポリマーなどの機能性材料の溶解又は分散を助けるものである。この溶 剤は、本発明のインク組成物の流動性を高める働きをして打滴などを行な 、易くする と共に、インク組成物を打滴し、所定の乾燥又は熱処理を行なった後は、その大半( 概ね 9割以上) 1S 蒸発などにより除かれる性質のものである。例えば、重合性モノマ 一も液状であるが、これに該溶剤を加えると、より流動性が高まり、打滴し易くなる。  The solvent in the present invention assists the dissolution or dispersion of functional materials such as a colorant, a polymerizable monomer, an additive, and a polymer contained in the ink composition of the present invention. This solvent functions to enhance the fluidity of the ink composition of the present invention to facilitate droplet ejection and the like, and after droplet ejection of the ink composition and predetermined drying or heat treatment, Most of them (approximately 90% or more) have properties that are removed by 1S evaporation. For example, the polymerizable monomer is also in a liquid state, but when the solvent is added thereto, the fluidity is further increased and droplet ejection is facilitated.
[0075] 溶剤としては、通常、沸点が 100°C以下の有機溶剤が用いられる。また、インクの乾 燥を防ぎヘッドの目詰まりを防止する目的では、沸点が 200°C以下、場合によっては それ以上の高沸点溶剤が用いられる。 [0075] As the solvent, an organic solvent having a boiling point of 100 ° C or lower is usually used. Ink dry For the purpose of preventing dryness and clogging of the head, a high boiling point solvent having a boiling point of 200 ° C or lower, and sometimes higher, is used.
[0076] 前記溶剤としては、「新版溶剤ポケットブック」(有機合成科学協会編、オーム社発 行)や「溶剤ハンドブック」(浅原照三ほか編、講談社、 1976年)に記載のものをさす 。具体例としては、イオン交換水、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート 等のエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類;ジエチレングリコールモ ノメチノレエーテル、ジエチレングリコーノレモノェチノレエーテノレ等のジエチレングリコー ルモノアルキルエーテル類;ジエチレングリコールモノ n ブチルエーテルァセテ ート等のジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類;プロピレングリコー ノレモノメチノレエーテノレアセテート、プロピレングリコーノレモノェチノレエーテノレアセテー ト等のプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類;ジエチレングリコール ジメチルエーテル等の他のエーテル類;シクロへキサノン、 2 へプタノン、 3 ヘプ タノン、メチルェチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、アセトン等のケトン類; 2—ヒドロ キシプロピオン酸ェチル等の乳酸アルキルエステル類; 3—メチルー 3—メトキシブチ ルプロピオネート、 3—メトキシプロピオン酸ェチル、 3—エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、 3—エトキシプロピオン酸ェチル、酢酸 n—ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、ギ酸 n—ァミル、 酢酸イソァミル、プロピオン酸 n—ブチル、酪酸ェチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸 n— ブチル、ピルビン酸ェチル等の他のエステル類; Ύ ブチロラタトン等の高沸点溶剤 類を用いることができる。 [0076] Examples of the solvent include those described in "New Edition Solvent Pocket Book" (edited by Organic Synthetic Science Association, published by Ohm) and "Solvent Handbook" (edited by Shozo Asahara et al., Kodansha, 1976). Specific examples include ion-exchanged water, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate; diethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers such as diethylene glycol monomethylol ether, diethylene glycol monomethenole etherenole; diethylene glycol Diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as mono-n-butyl ether acetate; Propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as propylene glycol noremonomethinoatenoreacetate and propyleneglycolenoethylenoleatenoreacetate; diethylene glycol dimethyl ether Other ethers such as: cyclohexanone, 2 heptanone, 3 heptanone, methyl ethyl keto , Ketones such as methyl isobutyl ketone and acetone; lactic acid alkyl esters such as 2-hydroxypropionate ethyl; 3-methyl-3-methoxybutyropionate, 3-methoxypropionate ethyl, 3-ethoxypropionate methyl, 3-ethoxy Echiru propionic acid, acetic acid n- butyl, isobutyl acetate, formic acid n- Amiru acetate Isoamiru, n- butyl propionate, butyrate Echiru, isopropyl butyrate n- butyl, other esters such as pyruvic acid Echiru; Y Buchirorataton etc. These high boiling solvents can be used.
[0077] 本発明のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物は、固形分量が 15質量%以 上であるのが好ましぐ 50質量%以上であるのがより好ましい。ここで、固形分とは、 溶剤以外の成分を 、、溶剤にっ 、ては既述の通りである。  [0077] The ink composition for an inkjet color filter of the present invention preferably has a solid content of 15% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more. Here, the solid content is a component other than the solvent, and the solvent is as described above.
また、本発明のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物は、粘度としては 2〜30 mPa ' sが好ましぐ 5〜20111?& ' 5カょり好ましく、表面張力としては、 10〜50dyneZ cmが好ましぐ 20〜40dyneZcmがより好ましい。  In addition, the ink composition for an inkjet color filter of the present invention preferably has a viscosity of 2 to 30 mPa's, more preferably 5 to 20111? & '5, and a surface tension of 10 to 50 dyneZ cm. 20-40 dyneZcm is more preferable.
[0078] <カラーフィルタ及びその製造方法 >  <Color filter and manufacturing method thereof>
本発明におけるカラーフィルタは、基板上に、色相の異なる 2色以上の画素群と画 素群を構成する各画素を互いに離隔する遮光性の濃色離画壁とを有してなるもので ある。このカラーフィルタは、濃色離画壁で取り囲まれた凹部にインクジェット法により 着色領域 (着色層)を設けて画素パターンを形成して構成されるものである。 The color filter according to the present invention includes, on a substrate, a pixel group of two or more colors having different hues and a light-shielding dark color separation wall that separates the pixels constituting the pixel group from each other. is there. This color filter is configured by forming a pixel pattern by providing a colored region (colored layer) by a inkjet method in a recess surrounded by a dark color separation wall.
[0079] 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法は、濃色離画壁で区画して離隔された凹部に 、既述の本発明のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物をインクジェット法により 付与して着色領域を形成する工程 (以下、「着色領域形成工程」ということがある。)を 有する。本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法は、好ましくは更に、形成された少なくと も 1色の着色領域を活性光線の照射により硬化する硬化工程や、所望の色相の着色 領域の全てを形成した後に熱により硬化する硬化工程を有する。また、本発明のカラ 一フィルタの製造方法は、必要に応じて、ベータ処理、撥インク処理する等の他のェ 程を設けて構成することができる。  [0079] The method for producing a color filter of the present invention includes the above-described ink composition for an ink-jet color filter according to the present invention applied to the concave portions partitioned and separated by a dark color separation wall by an ink-jet method. (Hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “colored region forming step”). The method for producing a color filter of the present invention preferably further comprises a curing step in which at least one colored region formed is cured by irradiation with actinic rays, or after all colored regions having a desired hue are formed. It has a hardening process which hardens by. In addition, the color filter manufacturing method of the present invention can be configured by providing other processes such as a beta process and an ink repellent process as needed.
なお、濃色離画壁は、着色領域形成工程前に予め基板上に形成されたものであり 、濃色離画壁の形成方法の詳細については後述する。  Note that the dark color separation wall is formed on the substrate in advance before the colored region forming step, and details of the method of forming the dark color separation wall will be described later.
[0080] 一着色領域形成工程  [0080] One colored region forming step
着色領域形成工程は、濃色離画壁間の凹部に、既述のように本発明に係る界面活 性剤と共に着色剤 (R, G又は Bを含む)を含有するインクジェットカラーフィルタ用ィ ンク組成物の液滴をインクジェット法で付与して着色領域を形成する。この着色領域 は、カラーフィルタを構成する赤色 (R)、緑色 (G)、青色 (B)等の色画素となるもので ある。  The colored region forming step includes an inkjet color filter ink containing a colorant (including R, G, or B) together with the surfactant according to the present invention in the recesses between the dark color separation walls as described above. A droplet of the composition is applied by an inkjet method to form a colored region. This colored region is a color pixel of red (R), green (G), blue (B), etc. constituting the color filter.
[0081] 着色領域の形成は、既述のようにして基板上に形成された濃色離画壁で取り囲ま れた凹部に、着色画素(例えば RGB3色の画素パターン)を形成するための着色液 体組成物として、本発明のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物を侵入させて、 2色以上の複数の画素で構成されるように形成することができる。  [0081] The colored region is formed by a coloring liquid for forming colored pixels (for example, RGB three-color pixel pattern) in the recesses surrounded by the dark color separation wall formed on the substrate as described above. As the body composition, the ink composition for an inkjet color filter of the present invention can be penetrated to form a plurality of pixels of two or more colors.
[0082] インクジェット法にっ 、ては、インクを熱硬化させる方法、インクを光硬化させる方法 、予め基板上に透明な受像層を形成しておいてからインクを打滴する方法など、公 知の方法を用いることができる。  [0082] Inkjet methods are known such as a method of thermally curing ink, a method of photocuring ink, and a method of ejecting ink after forming a transparent image-receiving layer on a substrate in advance. This method can be used.
[0083] 本工程において、濃色離画壁で取り囲まれた凹部に吐出する吐出量は、所望の色 相、濃度を得るために適宜選択することができる。好ましくは、 1つの液滴の大きさが 0. l〜100pl (ピコリットル)が好ましぐ l〜50plがより好ましい。 [0084] カラーフィルタパターンの形状については、特に限定はなぐブラックマトリックス形 状として一般的なストライプ状であっても、格子状であっても、さらにはデルタ配列状 であってもよい。 [0083] In this step, the discharge amount discharged to the recess surrounded by the dark color separation wall can be appropriately selected in order to obtain a desired hue and density. Preferably, the size of one droplet is preferably 0.1 to 100 pl (picoliter), more preferably 1 to 50 pl. [0084] The shape of the color filter pattern is not particularly limited, and may be a general stripe shape as a black matrix shape, a lattice shape, or a delta arrangement.
[0085] インクジェット法としては、帯電したインクを連続的に噴射し電場によって制御する 方法、圧電素子を用いて間欠的にインクを噴射する方法、インクを加熱しその発泡を 利用して間欠的に噴射する方法等、各種の方法を採用できる。  [0085] As an ink jet method, a method in which charged ink is continuously ejected and controlled by an electric field, a method in which ink is ejected intermittently using a piezoelectric element, and an ink is heated and intermittently utilized by using its foaming. Various methods such as a spraying method can be adopted.
[0086] インクの射出条件としては、インクを 40〜70°Cに加熱し、インク粘度を下げて射出 することが射出安定性の点で好ましい。着色液体組成物は、概して水性インクより粘 度が高いため、温度変動による粘度変動幅が大きい。粘度変動はそのまま液滴サイ ズ、液滴射出速度に大きく影響を与え、画質劣化を起こしやすいため、インク温度を できるだけ一定に保つことが重要である。  [0086] As the ink ejection conditions, it is preferable from the viewpoint of ejection stability that the ink is heated to 40 to 70 ° C to lower the ink viscosity. Since the colored liquid composition is generally higher in viscosity than the water-based ink, the viscosity fluctuation range due to temperature fluctuation is large. It is important to keep the ink temperature as constant as possible because viscosity fluctuations directly affect the droplet size and droplet ejection speed, and easily cause image quality degradation.
[0087] インクジェットヘッド(以下、単にヘッドともいう。 )には、公知のものを適用でき、コン ティニァスタイプ、ドットオンデマンドタイプが使用可能である。ドットオンデマンドタイ プのうち、サーマルヘッドでは、吐出のため、特開平 9 323420号に記載されてい るような稼動弁を持つタイプが好ましい。ピエゾヘッドでは、例えば、欧州特許 A277 , 703号、欧州特許 A278, 590号などに記載されているヘッドを使うことができる。 ヘッドはインクの温度が管理できるよう温調機能を持つものが好まし 、。射出時の粘 度は 5〜25mPa' sとなるよう射出温度を設定し、粘度の変動幅が士 5%以内になるよ うインク温度を制御することが好ましい。また、駆動周波数としては、 l〜500kHzで稼 動することが好ましい。  As the ink jet head (hereinafter also simply referred to as a head), a known one can be applied, and a continuous type or a dot on demand type can be used. Among the dot-on-demand types, the thermal head is preferably a type having an operating valve as described in JP-A-9323420 for discharging. As the piezo head, for example, the heads described in European Patent A277, 703, European Patent A278, 590, etc. can be used. The head should have a temperature control function so that the ink temperature can be controlled. It is preferable to set the injection temperature so that the viscosity at the time of ejection is 5 to 25 mPa's, and to control the ink temperature so that the fluctuation range of the viscosity is within 5%. The driving frequency is preferably 1 to 500 kHz.
[0088] 本発明におけるカラーフィルタは、 RGB3色のインクを吹き付けて 3色の着色領域( 着色層)からなる群で構成された形態が好ま ヽ。  [0088] The color filter according to the present invention preferably has a configuration constituted by a group of three colored regions (colored layers) by spraying RGB three colors of ink.
[0089] 硬化工程 [0089] Curing process
次に、着色領域形成工程以外に設けることができる工程について以下に説明する  Next, steps that can be provided other than the colored region forming step will be described below.
《第 1の硬化工程》 《First curing process》
前記着色領域形成工程で形成された少なくとも 1色の着色領域に活性光線を照射 して硬化する工程 (第 1の硬化工程)を設けることができる。第 1の硬化工程では、赤 色 (R)、緑色 (G)、及び青色 (B)を含む各色の本発明の硬化性インクを硬化させるこ とにより、硬化した着色領域を形成することができる。硬化は、 1色の着色領域を形成 するごとに行なってもよいし、複数色の着色領域を形成した後に行なうようにしてもよ い。 A step (first curing step) in which at least one colored region formed in the colored region forming step is cured by irradiation with an actinic ray can be provided. In the first curing process, red A cured colored region can be formed by curing the curable ink of the present invention of each color including color (R), green (G), and blue (B). Curing may be performed every time a colored region of one color is formed, or may be performed after forming colored regions of a plurality of colors.
[0090] R, G, B等の本発明に係る硬化性インクの硬化は、インクの持つ感光波長に対応 する波長領域の活性エネルギー線を発するエネルギー源を用いて重合硬化を促進 する露光処理を施すことにより行なえる。  [0090] Curing of the curable ink according to the present invention, such as R, G, B, etc., involves an exposure process that promotes polymerization and curing using an energy source that emits active energy rays in a wavelength region corresponding to the photosensitive wavelength of the ink. It can be done by applying.
[0091] エネルギー源としては、例えば、 400〜200nmの紫外線、遠紫外線、 g線、 h線、 i 線、 KrFエキシマレーザー光、 ArFエキシマレーザー光、電子線、 X線、分子線、又 はイオンビームなど、既述の重合開始剤が感応するものを適宜選択して用いることが できる。具体的には、 250〜450nm、好ましくは 365 ± 20nmの波長領域に属する 活性光線を発する光源、例えば、 LD、 LED (発光ダイオード)、蛍光灯、低圧水銀灯 、高圧水銀灯、メタルノヽライドランプ、カーボンアーク灯、キセノンランプ、ケミカルラン プなどを用いて好適に行なうことができる。好ましい光源には、 LED、高圧水銀灯、メ タルノヽライドランプが挙げられる。  [0091] Examples of the energy source include ultraviolet rays of 400 to 200 nm, far ultraviolet rays, g-line, h-line, i-line, KrF excimer laser beam, ArF excimer laser beam, electron beam, X-ray, molecular beam, or ion. A beam, such as a beam, to which the above-described polymerization initiator is sensitive can be appropriately selected and used. Specifically, a light source emitting active light belonging to a wavelength region of 250 to 450 nm, preferably 365 ± 20 nm, for example, LD, LED (light emitting diode), fluorescent lamp, low pressure mercury lamp, high pressure mercury lamp, metal nitride lamp, carbon An arc lamp, a xenon lamp, a chemical lamp, or the like can be preferably used. Preferred light sources include LEDs, high pressure mercury lamps, and metal halide lamps.
[0092] 活性エネルギー線の照射時間としては、重合性ィ匕合物と重合開始剤との組合せに 応じて適宜設定することができるが、例えば、照度 20mWZcm2で露光する場合は、 1〜750秒とすることができる。 [0092] The irradiation time of the active energy ray can be appropriately set according to the combination of the polymerizable compound and the polymerization initiator. For example, when exposure is performed at an illuminance of 20 mWZcm 2 , 1 to 750 Can be seconds.
[0093] 《第 2の硬化工程》  [0093] << Second curing step >>
本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法においては、赤色 (R)、緑色 (G)、及び青色( B)を含む所望の色相の着色領域の全てを熱により硬化する工程 (第 2の硬化工程) を更に設けることができる。上記したように、前記第 1の硬化工程を設けると共に第 2 の硬化工程を設けることによって、カラーフィルタの製造効率と表示特性とを両立さ せことができる。  In the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, a step (second curing step) of curing all the colored regions of a desired hue including red (R), green (G), and blue (B) by heat. Further, it can be provided. As described above, by providing the first curing step and the second curing step, it is possible to achieve both the production efficiency of the color filter and the display characteristics.
[0094] 本工程では、所望の色相からなる着色領域及び濃色離画壁を形成し、前記第 1の 硬化工程を行なった後にさらに加熱処理 (いわゆるベータ処理)を行なって熱による 硬化を施す。すなわち、光照射により光重合した着色領域及び濃色離画壁が形成さ れている基板を、電気炉、乾燥器等に入れて加熱する、あるいは赤外線ランプを照 射して加熱する。 In this step, a colored region having a desired hue and a dark color separation wall are formed, and after performing the first curing step, a heat treatment (so-called beta treatment) is further performed to cure by heat. . That is, a substrate on which a colored region photopolymerized by light irradiation and a dark color separation wall are formed is heated in an electric furnace, a dryer, or an infrared lamp is irradiated. Shoot and heat.
[0095] 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法で形成される着色領域 (着色層;すなわち画素 )のサイズとしては、画素の 1辺の長さが 50〜300 /ζ πιが好ましぐ 70〜300 111カょ り好ましぐ 100〜300 mが特に好ましい。また、同色の画素が縦状にしきりなく並 んだストライプ状でもよい。  [0095] As the size of the colored region (colored layer; that is, pixel) formed by the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, the length of one side of the pixel is preferably 50 to 300 / ζ πι. Particularly preferred is 111 to 100-300 m. Further, it may be a stripe shape in which pixels of the same color are arranged in a vertical shape.
[0096] このときの加熱温度及び加熱時間は、着色液体組成物の組成や着色領域の厚み に依存する。一般に充分な耐溶剤性、耐アルカリ性、及び紫外線吸光度を確保する 観点から、加熱温度及び加熱時間は、約 120°C〜約 250°Cで約 10分〜約 120分間 であることが好ましい。  [0096] The heating temperature and heating time at this time depend on the composition of the colored liquid composition and the thickness of the colored region. In general, from the viewpoint of ensuring sufficient solvent resistance, alkali resistance, and ultraviolet absorbance, the heating temperature and heating time are preferably about 120 ° C. to about 250 ° C. for about 10 minutes to about 120 minutes.
[0097] 本発明のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物をインクジェット付与して形成 された着色領域 (着色層)の表面粗さ (Ra値)は 5nm以下であるのが好ましぐより好 ましくは 4nm以下である。この Ra値は、接触膜厚計 (Tencor社製の触針式表面粗さ 計 P10)により測定されるものである。  [0097] The surface roughness (Ra value) of the colored region (colored layer) formed by applying the ink composition for an inkjet color filter of the present invention to an inkjet is preferably 5 nm or less, more preferably. 4 nm or less. This Ra value is measured by a contact film thickness meter (a stylus type surface roughness meter P10 manufactured by Tencor).
[0098] 隔壁形成工程  [0098] Partition formation process
既述の着色領域形成工程及び硬化工程を行なう前には、濃色離画壁を形成する 隔壁形成工程を設けることができ、この隔壁形成工程は、濃色組成物を用いて濃色 離画壁を形成する。  Before performing the colored region forming step and the curing step described above, a partition wall forming step for forming a dark color separation wall can be provided, and this partition wall forming step is performed using a dark color composition. Form a wall.
[0099] 濃色組成物とは、好ましくは光学濃度の高い組成物であり、好ましい光学濃度は濃 色離画壁相当厚みの感光性榭脂組成物層を形成したときに、 2. 0〜10. 0になる光 学濃度である。より好ましい光学濃度は 2. 5〜6. 0であり、特に好ましくは 3. 0〜5. 0である。また、感光性榭脂層及び濃色組成物は、後述のように好ましくは光開始系 で硬化させるときには、露光波長(一般には紫外域)に対する光学濃度も重要である 。光学濃度の値としては、 2. 0-10. 0力 S好ましく、より好ましくは 2. 5〜6. 0であり、 最も好ましくは 3. 0〜5. 0である。光学濃度が前記範囲内であると、重合硬化が良好 になり、所望形状の濃色離画壁を形成することができる。濃色の性質は、後述する染 料、顔料などの各種色材又は各形態の炭素あるいはこれらの組合せ力 なる材料を 用いて付与することができ、黒色が最も多い。  [0099] The dark color composition is preferably a composition having a high optical density, and the preferred optical density is 2.0 to 2.0 when a photosensitive resin composition layer having a thickness equivalent to a dark color separation wall is formed. 10. Optical density at 0. The more preferable optical density is 2.5 to 6.0, and particularly preferably 3.0 to 5.0. Further, as described later, the optical density with respect to the exposure wavelength (generally the ultraviolet region) is also important for the photosensitive resin layer and the dark color composition, preferably when cured with a photoinitiating system. The optical density value is preferably 2.0 to 10.0 force S, more preferably 2.5 to 6.0, and most preferably 3.0 to 5.0. When the optical density is within the above range, the polymerization and curing becomes good, and a dark color separation wall having a desired shape can be formed. The dark color property can be imparted by using various coloring materials such as dyes and pigments described later, carbon in various forms, or materials having a combination of these, and black is the most common.
[0100] 濃色組成物は、色材と重合開始系と重合性ィ匕合物とを少なくとも用いて構成するこ とができ、前記重合開始系としては、熱開始剤を用いる熱開始系、光開始剤を用いる 光開始系が一般に挙げられるが、光開始系で構成されるのが好ましい。 [0100] The dark color composition is composed of at least a colorant, a polymerization initiation system, and a polymerizable compound. As the polymerization initiation system, a thermal initiation system using a thermal initiator and a photoinitiation system using a photoinitiator are generally mentioned, but it is preferable to be composed of a photoinitiation system.
[0101] 光開始系による場合、本発明におけるカラーフィルタを構成する濃色離画壁の形 成は、例えば、既述の着色領域形成工程及び硬化工程を行なう前に、基板の少なく とも一方に濃色組成物を用いて感光性榭脂層を形成し、形成された感光性榭脂層を (好ましくは貧酸素条件下で)パターン状に露光し、現像することにより好適に行なう ことができる。濃色離画壁は、既述のように、本発明の硬化性インク (着色液体組成 物)による液滴をインクジェット法で打滴して形成される着色領域を離隔する隔壁バタ ーンである。また、隔壁形成工程において少なくとも感光性榭脂層を形成、露光した 後には、必要に応じてベータ処理する、撥インク処理する等の他の工程を設けること ができる。  [0101] In the case of using the photoinitiating system, the formation of the dark color separation wall constituting the color filter in the present invention is performed, for example, on at least one of the substrates before the colored region forming step and the curing step described above are performed. A photosensitive resin layer is formed using the dark color composition, and the formed photosensitive resin layer can be suitably exposed by patterning (preferably under poor oxygen conditions) and developing. . As described above, the dark color separation wall is a partition wall pattern that separates colored areas formed by ejecting droplets of the curable ink (colored liquid composition) of the present invention by an ink jet method. . In addition, after forming and exposing at least the photosensitive resin layer in the partition wall forming step, other steps such as a beta treatment or an ink repellent treatment can be provided as necessary.
以下、重合開始系として光開始系を用いて構成された場合を中心に説明する。  Hereinafter, the case where it is configured using a photoinitiation system as a polymerization initiation system will be mainly described.
[0102] [感光性榭脂層の形成]  [0102] [Formation of photosensitive resin layer]
感光性榭脂層は、色材、重合性化合物、及び光開始系を含む濃色組成物を用い て構成することができ、必要に応じて更にバインダー、公知の添加剤、例えば、可塑 剤、充填剤、安定化剤、重合禁止剤、界面活性剤、溶剤、密着促進剤等の他の成分 を用いて構成できる。  The photosensitive resin layer can be constituted by using a dark color composition containing a coloring material, a polymerizable compound, and a photoinitiating system, and if necessary, further a binder, a known additive such as a plasticizer, Other components such as a filler, a stabilizer, a polymerization inhibitor, a surfactant, a solvent, and an adhesion promoter can be used.
具体的には、感光性榭脂層は濃色組成物(例えば重合性モノマーと光重合開始剤 とバインダーと色材とを少なくとも含む。)を基板上に付与する方法 (好ましくは、濃色 組成物を塗布する塗布法)や、濃色組成物を用いた感光性榭脂層を有する感光性 転写材料を用いて感光性榭脂層を基板上に転写する方法 (転写法)により形成する ことができる。濃色組成物及び感光性転写材料の詳細にっ 、ては後述する。  Specifically, the photosensitive resin layer is a method of applying a dark color composition (for example, containing at least a polymerizable monomer, a photopolymerization initiator, a binder, and a coloring material) onto a substrate (preferably a dark color composition). Or a method of transferring a photosensitive resin layer onto a substrate using a photosensitive transfer material having a photosensitive resin layer using a dark color composition (transfer method). Can do. Details of the dark color composition and the photosensitive transfer material will be described later.
[0103] 感光性榭脂層を塗布形成する方法 (塗布法)による場合、塗布は、液を吐出する部 分にスリット状の穴を有するスリット状ノズル又はスリットコーターを用いて行なうことが 好ましい。 [0103] In the case of applying a photosensitive resin layer by coating (coating method), the coating is preferably performed using a slit-shaped nozzle or slit coater having a slit-shaped hole in a portion for discharging the liquid.
具体的には、特開 2004— 89851号公報、特開 2004— 17043号公報、特開 200 3— 170098号公報、特開 2003— 164787号公報、特開 2003— 10767号公報、 特開 2002— 79163号公報、特開 2001— 310147号公報等に記載のスリット状ノズ ル、及びスリットコーターが好適に用いることができる。その他の例として、スピナ一、 ホヮイラ1 ~"ゝ口1 ~" ' ~"コ1 ~"タ' ~"ゝ力. ~"テ、ノュ ~"タ' ~"ゝナイフコ1 ~"タ' ~"ゝワイヤ1 ~"ノ 1 ~"コ1 ~" ター、エタストルーダー等の塗布機を用いて行なうようにしてもよ 、。 Specifically, JP-A-2004-89851, JP-A-2004-17043, JP-A-2003-170098, JP-A-2003-164787, JP-A-2003-10767, JP-A-2002- No. 79163, slit-shaped nose described in JP 2001-310147 A, etc. And a slit coater can be suitably used. As another example, a spinner of all, Howaira one to "ゝthe mouth 1 ~"'~"co-1to"data' ~ "ゝforce. ~" Te, Noyu ~ "data '~"ゝNaifuko one to "data' ~ It is possible to use an applicator such as “ゝ Wire 1 ~” “No 1 ” ~ “Co 1 ~” or an Etrustruder.
[0104] 塗布法による場合には、基板上に濃色組成物を用いて感光性榭脂層を塗布形成 する工程を設け、後述するように、塗布形成された感光性榭脂層を〔好ましくは貧酸 素条件 (例えば、感光性榭脂層上に更に酸素遮断層を塗布形成し該酸素遮断層を 介して、あるいは不活性ガス雰囲気又は減圧条件)にして〕露光し、現像してパター ニングすることによって濃色離画壁を形成する。酸素遮断層は、後述の感光性転写 材料に酸素遮断層と同様に構成することができる。  [0104] In the case of the coating method, a step of coating and forming a photosensitive resin layer using a dark color composition on a substrate is provided, and as described later, the coated and coated photosensitive resin layer [preferably Is exposed to an oxygen condition (for example, an oxygen barrier layer is further formed on the photosensitive resin layer and formed through the oxygen barrier layer, or an inert gas atmosphere or a reduced pressure condition). By darkening, a dark color separation wall is formed. The oxygen blocking layer can be formed in the same manner as the oxygen blocking layer in the photosensitive transfer material described later.
露光、現像の詳細については後述する。  Details of exposure and development will be described later.
[0105] 転写法による場合、後述する感光性転写材料を用い、仮支持体上に膜状に形成さ れた感光性榭脂層を基板面に加熱及び Z又は加圧したローラー又は平板で圧着又 は加熱圧着することによって貼り付け (ラミネート)、仮支持体を残したまま (貧酸素条 件下)前記感光性榭脂層を、あるいは更に仮支持体を剥離して感光性榭脂層を転写 し、転写形成された前記感光性榭脂層を〔好ましくは貧酸素条件 (例えば、感光性榭 脂層上に設けられた酸素遮断層を介して)にして〕露光し、現像してパターユングす ることにより濃色離画壁を形成する。露光、現像の詳細については後述する。  [0105] In the case of the transfer method, a photosensitive transfer material described later is used, and the photosensitive resin layer formed in a film shape on the temporary support is pressure-bonded with a roller or a flat plate heated and Z or pressed on the substrate surface. Alternatively, pasting by thermocompression bonding (laminate), leaving the temporary support (under anoxic conditions), remove the photosensitive resin layer, or further remove the temporary support to remove the photosensitive resin layer. The photosensitive resin layer that has been transferred and transferred is exposed (preferably under poor oxygen conditions (for example, through an oxygen barrier layer provided on the photosensitive resin layer)), developed, and patterned. A deep color separation wall is formed by Jung. Details of exposure and development will be described later.
ラミネートは、具体的には、特開平 7— 110575号公報、特開平 11— 77942号公 報、特開 2000— 334836号公報、特開 2002— 148794号公報に記載のラミネータ 一及びラミネート方法により行なえる。なお、感光性転写材料及び転写法による転写 に関する詳細については後述する。  Specifically, the laminating can be performed by a laminator and a laminating method described in JP-A-7-110575, JP-A-11-77942, JP-A-2000-334836, and JP-A-2002-148794. The Details regarding the photosensitive transfer material and transfer by a transfer method will be described later.
[0106] 感光性榭脂層の層厚としては、濃色組成物の固形分及び形成する濃色離画壁の 高さに依存し、特に限定されるものではないが、一般に、 1. 5〜: LO /z mが好ましぐ 1 . 8〜7. 力より好ましく、 2. 2〜5. 0 m力 ^更に好まし!/、。  [0106] The layer thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is not particularly limited and depends on the solid content of the dark color composition and the height of the dark color separation wall to be formed. ~: LO / zm is preferred 1.8-8. Force is more preferred, 2. 2-5.0 m force ^ More preferred! / ,.
[0107] 〜濃色組成物、感光性榭脂層〜  [0107] ~ Dark color composition, photosensitive resin layer ~
以下、濃色離画壁を形成するための濃色組成物、及びこれを用いてなる感光性榭 脂層の構成成分について詳述する。  Hereinafter, the dark color composition for forming the dark color separation wall and the components of the photosensitive resin layer using the same will be described in detail.
[0108] 一重合性化合物 濃色離画壁形成用の感光性榭脂層又は濃色組成物は、重合性化合物の少なくと も一種を含有するのが好ましい。後述の光開始系からの活性種の作用を受けて硬化 し、ノターンを形成することができる。 [0108] Monopolymeric compound It is preferable that the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition for forming the dark color separation wall contains at least one polymerizable compound. It can be cured by the action of active species from the photoinitiating system described later to form noturn.
[0109] 重合性ィ匕合物としては、単官能もしくは多官能のモノマーが挙げられ、多官能性モ ノマーが好ましい。多官能性モノマーは、重合性基を 2以上有する重合性モノマーで あり、一種単独で又は他のモノマーと組み合わせて用いることができる。  [0109] Examples of the polymerizable compound include monofunctional or polyfunctional monomers, and polyfunctional monomers are preferred. The polyfunctional monomer is a polymerizable monomer having two or more polymerizable groups, and can be used alone or in combination with other monomers.
[0110] 単官能もしくは多官能のモノマーの具体的な例としては、 t—ブチル (メタ)アタリレ ート、エチレングリコールジ(メタ)アタリレート、 2—ヒドロキシプロピル (メタ)アタリレー ト、トリエチレングリコールジ (メタ)アタリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アタリレ ート、 2—ェチルー 2—ブチループロパンジオールジ (メタ)アタリレート、ペンタエリス リトールトリ(メタ)アタリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ (メタ)アタリレート、ジペンタエ リスリトールへキサ(メタ)アタリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ (メタ)アタリレート、 ポリオキシェチルイ匕トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アタリレート、トリス(2— (メタ)ァク リロイルォキシェチル)イソシァヌレート、 1, 4ージイソプロべ-ルベンゼン、 1, 4ージ ヒドロキシベンゼンジ (メタ)アタリレート、デカメチレングリコールジ (メタ)アタリレート、 スチレン、ジァリルフマレート、トリメリット酸トリアリル、ラウリル (メタ)アタリレート、 (メタ) アクリルアミド、キシリレンビス (メタ)アクリルアミド、等が挙げられる。  [0110] Specific examples of the monofunctional or polyfunctional monomer include t-butyl (meth) acrylate, ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, triethylene glycol. Di (meth) acrylate, trimethylol propane tri (meth) acrylate, 2-ethyl-2-propane diol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, penta erythritol tetra (meth) acrylate , Dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, polyoxyethyl trimethylol propane tri (meth) acrylate, tris (2- (meth) acryloyloxie Chill) isocyanurate, 1,4-diisopropyl Robert benzene, 1,4-dihydroxybenzene di (meth) acrylate, decamethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, styrene, diallyl fumarate, triallyl trimellitic acid, lauryl (meth) acrylate, ( And (meth) acrylamide, xylylenebis (meth) acrylamide, and the like.
また、 2—ヒドロキシェチル (メタ)アタリレート、 2—ヒドロキシプロピル (メタ)アタリレー ト、ポリエチレングリコールモノ (メタ)アタリレート等のヒドロキシル基を有する化合物と In addition, compounds having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, and polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate
、へキサメチレンジイソシァネート、トルエンジイソシァネート、キシレンジイソシァネー ト等のジイソシァネートとの反応物も挙げられる。 And reaction products with diisocyanates such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, toluene diisocyanate, and xylene diisocyanate.
[0111] 上記のうち、特に好ましいのは、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアタリレート、ジペンタエリ スリトールへキサアタリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアタリレート、トリス(2—ァ クリロイルォキシェチル)イソシァヌレートである。  [0111] Among the above, pentaerythritol tetraatalylate, dipentaerythritol hexaatalylate, dipentaerythritol pentaatalylate, and tris (2-acryloyloxychetyl) isocyanurate are particularly preferable.
[0112] 重合性化合物の感光性榭脂層又は濃色組成物中における含有量としては、層又 は組成物の全固形分 (質量)に対して、 5〜80質量%が好ましぐ 10〜70質量%が 特に好ましい。該含有量が前記範囲内であると、光硬化後のアルカリ現像液に対す る耐性を確保するのに有効である。 [0113] 一光開始系 [0112] The content of the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition is preferably 5 to 80% by mass with respect to the total solid content (mass) of the layer or composition. -70% by weight is particularly preferred. When the content is within the above range, it is effective to ensure the resistance to the alkali developer after photocuring. [0113] One light start system
濃色離画壁形成用の感光性榭脂層又は濃色組成物は、光開始系の少なくとも一 種を含有するのが好ましい。光開始系は、可視光線、紫外線、遠紫外線、電子線、 X 線等の放射線の照射 (露光ともいう)により、前記重合性化合物の重合を開始する活 性種を発生する化合物であり、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択することができる。  It is preferable that the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition for forming the dark color separation wall contains at least one photoinitiating system. The photoinitiating system is a compound that generates an active species that initiates polymerization of the polymerizable compound upon irradiation (also referred to as exposure) of radiation such as visible light, ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, electron beam, or X-ray. It can select suitably from these compounds.
[0114] 例えば、トリノ、ロメチル基含有ィ匕合物、アタリジン系化合物、ァセトフエノン系化合物 、ビスイミダゾール系化合物、トリアジン系化合物、ベンゾイン系化合物、ベンゾフエノ ン系化合物、 α—ジケトン系化合物、多核キノン系化合物、キサントン系化合物、ジ ァゾ系化合物、等を挙げることができる。  [0114] For example, torino, romethyl group-containing compounds, atalidine compounds, acetophenone compounds, bisimidazole compounds, triazine compounds, benzoin compounds, benzophenone compounds, α-diketone compounds, polynuclear quinone compounds Compounds, xanthone compounds, diazo compounds, and the like.
[0115] 具体的には、特開 2001— 117230公報に記載の、トリノ、ロメチル基が置換したトリ ハロメチルォキサゾール誘導体又は s—トリァジン誘導体、米国特許第 4239850号 明細書に記載のトリハロメチル— s トリアジンィ匕合物、米国特許第 4212976号明細 書に記載のトリハロメチルォキサジァゾールイ匕合物などのトリハロメチル基含有ィ匕合 物; [0115] Specifically, trino, trihalomethyloxazole derivatives or s -triazine derivatives substituted with a trino or romethyl group described in JP-A-2001-117230, trihalomethyl described in US Pat. No. 4,239,850 — S triazine compounds, trihalomethyl group-containing compounds such as trihalomethyl oxadiazole compounds described in US Pat. No. 4,212,976;
[0116] 9 フエ-ルァクリジン、 9 ピリジルアタリジン、 9 ピラジュルァクリジン、 1, 2 ビス  [0116] 9 Phenulacridine, 9 Pyridylatridine, 9 Pyrazuracridine, 1, 2 Bis
(9—アタリジ-ル)ェタン、 1, 3 ビス(9—アタリジ-ル)プロパン、 1, 4 ビス(9— アタリジ -ル)ブタン、 1, 5 ビス(9—アタリジ-ル)ペンタン、 1, 6 ビス(9—アタリ ジ -ル)へキサン、 1 , 7 ビス(9—アタリジ-ル)ヘプタン、 1, 8 ビス(9—アタリジ- ル)オクタン、 1 , 9 ビス(9—アタリジ-ル)ノナン、 1, 10 ビス(9—アタリジ-ル)デ カン、 1, 11—ビス(9—アタリジ-ル)ゥンデカン、 1, 12 ビス(9—アタリジ-ル)ドデ カン等のビス(9—アタリジ-ル)アルカン、などのアタリジン系化合物;  (9-Ataridyl) ethane, 1,3 bis (9-Ataridyl) propane, 1,4 bis (9-Ataridyl) butane, 1,5 bis (9-Ataridyl) pentane, 1, 6 Bis (9-Ataridiyl) hexane, 1,7 Bis (9-Ataridiyl) heptane, 1,8 Bis (9-Ataridiyl) octane, 1,9 Bis (9-Ataridiyl) Nonane, 1, 10 Bis (9-Ataridyl) decane, 1, 11-Bis (9-Ataridyl) undecane, 1,12 Bis (9-Ataridyl) dodecane, etc. Attalizyl) alkanes, and other atalidine compounds;
[0117] 6— (p—メトキシフエ-ル) 2, 4—ビス(トリクロロメチル) s トリァジン、 6—〔p— ( N, N ビス(エトキシカルボ-ルメチル)ァミノ)フエ-ル〕一 2, 4 ビス(トリクロロメチ ル)— s トリァジンなどのトリアジン系化合物;その他、 9, 10 ジメチルベンズフエナ ジン、ミヒラーズケトン、ベンゾフエノン Zミヒラーズケトン、へキサァリールビスイミダゾ ール/メルカプトべンズイミダゾール、ベンジルジメチルケタール、チォキサントン/ ァミン、 2, 2'—ビス(2, 4 ジクロロフエ-ル)一 4, 4', 5, 5'—テトラフエ-ル一 1, 2' ビスイミダゾーノレ、などが挙げられる。 [0118] 上記のうち、トリノ、ロメチル基含有ィ匕合物、アタリジン系化合物、ァセトフエノン系化 合物、ビスイミダゾール系化合物、トリアジン系化合物力 選択される少なくとも一種 が好ましぐトリハロメチル基含有化合物及びアタリジン系化合物から選択される少な くとも一種が特に好ましい。トリノ、ロメチル基含有ィ匕合物、アタリジン系化合物は、汎 用性でかつ安価である点でも有用である。 [0117] 6- (p-methoxyphenyl) 2, 4-bis (trichloromethyl) s triazine, 6- [p- (N, N bis (ethoxycarbomethyl) amino) phenol] 1, 2, 4 Bis (trichloromethyl) -triazine compounds such as triazine; 9, 10, dimethylbenzphenazine, Michler's ketone, benzophenone Z Michler's ketone, hexaarylbisimidazole / mercaptobenzimidazole, benzyldimethylketal, Thioxanthone / amine, 2,2'-bis (2,4 dichlorophenol) -1,4 ', 5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'bisimidazole, and the like. [0118] Of the above, a trihalomethyl group-containing compound in which at least one selected from trino, romethyl group-containing compounds, atalidine compounds, acetophenone compounds, bisimidazole compounds, and triazine compounds is preferred And at least one selected from the atalidine-based compounds is particularly preferred. Torino, romethyl group-containing compounds, and atalidine compounds are also useful because they are versatile and inexpensive.
[0119] 特に好ましいのは、前記トリハロメチル基含有ィ匕合物としては、 2 トリクロロメチル  [0119] The trihalomethyl group-containing compound is particularly preferably 2 trichloromethyl.
5—(p—スチリルスチリル) 1, 3, 4 ォキサジァゾール、 2—(p ブトキシスチリ ル) 5 トリクロロメチルー 1, 3, 4ーォキサジァゾールであり、前記アタリジン系化 合物としては 9 フエ-ルァクリジンであり、前記トリアジン系化合物としては、 6—〔p — (N, N ビス(エトキシカルボ-ルメチル)ァミノ)フエ-ル〕— 2, 4 ビス(トリクロ口 メチル) s—トリァジンであり、前記べンゾフエノン系化合物としては、ミヒラーズケトン であり、前記ビイミダゾール系化合物としては、 2, 2 '—ビス(2, 4 ジクロ口フエニル) —4, 4', 5, 5'—テトラフエ-ル一 1, 2'—ビスイミダゾールである。  5- (p-styrylstyryl) 1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2- (p-butoxystyryl) 5 trichloromethyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole. -Lucridine, and the triazine compound is 6- [p — (N, N bis (ethoxycarbomethyl) amino) phenol] -2, 4 bis (trichloromethyl) s-triazine, The Benzophenone compound is Michler's ketone, and the biimidazole compound is 2,2′-bis (2,4 dicyclophenyl) —4, 4 ′, 5, 5′-tetraphenyl 1 , 2'-bisimidazole.
[0120] 重合開始系(特に光開始系)は、一種単独で用いる以外に 2種以上を併用してもよ い。  [0120] The polymerization initiation system (particularly the photoinitiation system) may be used in combination of two or more in addition to being used alone.
重合開始系(特に光開始系)の感光性榭脂層又は濃色組成物中における総量とし ては、層又は組成物の全固形分 (質量)に対して、 0. 1〜20質量%が好ましぐ 0. 5 〜10質量%が特に好ましい。該総量が前記範囲内であると、硬化効率が高く短時間 で硬化でき、現像時に形成された画像パターンが欠落したり、パターン表面の荒れ 力生じることちない。  The total amount in the photosensitive resin layer or dark color composition of the polymerization initiation system (especially the photoinitiation system) is 0.1 to 20% by mass relative to the total solid content (mass) of the layer or composition. Preferred is 0.5 to 10% by mass. When the total amount is within the above range, the curing efficiency is high and the curing can be performed in a short time, and the image pattern formed at the time of development is not lost or the pattern surface is not rough.
[0121] 前記光開始系は、水素供与体を併用して構成されてもよい。水素供与体としては、 感度をより良化することができる点で、以下に定義するメルカブタン系化合物、ァミン 系化合物等が好ましい。ここで、「水素供与体」とは、露光により前記光重合開始剤か ら発生したラジカルに対して、水素原子を供与することができる化合物を 、う。  [0121] The photoinitiating system may be configured with a hydrogen donor. The hydrogen donor is preferably a mercabtan compound or an amine compound as defined below from the viewpoint that sensitivity can be further improved. Here, the “hydrogen donor” refers to a compound that can donate a hydrogen atom to a radical generated from the photopolymerization initiator by exposure.
[0122] 前記メルカブタン系化合物は、ベンゼン環あるいは複素環を母核とし、該母核に直 接結合したメルカプト基を 1個以上、好ましくは 1〜3個、更に好ましくは 1〜2個有す る化合物(以下、「メルカブタン系水素供与体」という。)である。  [0122] The mercabtan compound has a benzene ring or a heterocyclic ring as a mother nucleus, and has one or more, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 to 2, mercapto groups directly bonded to the mother nucleus. (Hereinafter, referred to as “mercabbutane-based hydrogen donor”).
また、前記アミン系化合物は、ベンゼン環あるいは複素環を母核とし、該母核に直 接結合したアミノ基を 1個以上、好ましくは 1〜3個、更に好ましくは 1〜2個有するィ匕 合物(以下、「ァミン系水素供与体」という。)である。 Further, the amine compound has a benzene ring or a heterocyclic ring as a mother nucleus, and is directly connected to the mother nucleus. It is a compound having 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 to 2 amino groups bonded to each other (hereinafter referred to as “aminic hydrogen donor”).
なお、水素供与体はメルカプト基とアミノ基とを同時に有していてもよい。  The hydrogen donor may have a mercapto group and an amino group at the same time.
[0123] 上記のメルカプタン系水素供与体の具体例としては、 2 メルカプトべンゾチアゾー ル、 2 メルカプトべンゾォキサゾール、 2 メルカプトべンゾイミダゾール、 2, 5 ジ メルカプト 1, 3, 4ーチアジアゾール、 2 メルカプト 2, 5 ジメチルァミノピリジン 、等が挙げられる。これらのうち、 2—メルカプトべンゾチアゾール、 2—メルカプトベン ゾォキサゾールが好ましく、特に 2—メルカプトべンゾチアゾールが好まし!/、。  [0123] Specific examples of the mercaptan-based hydrogen donor include 2 mercaptobenzozoazole, 2 mercaptobenzoxazole, 2 mercaptobenzozoimidazole, 2, 5 dimercapto 1, 3, 4-thiadiazole, 2 mercapto 2 , 5 dimethylaminopyridine, and the like. Of these, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole and 2-mercaptobenzoxazole are preferable, and 2-mercaptobenzothiazole is particularly preferable! /.
[0124] 上記のアミン系水素供与体の具体例としては、 4、 4' ビス(ジメチルァミノ)ベンゾ フエノン、 4、 4 '—ビス(ジェチルァミノ)ベンゾフエノン、 4ージェチルアミノアセトフエノ ン、 4ージメチルァミノプロピオフエノン、ェチルー 4ージメチルァミノべンゾエート、 4 —ジメチルァミノ安息香酸、 4—ジメチルァミノべンゾ-トリル等が挙げられる。これら のうち、 4, 4 '—ビス(ジメチルァミノ)ベンゾフエノン、 4, 4 '—ビス(ジェチルァミノ)ベ ンゾフエノンが好ましく、特に 4, 4'—ビス(ジェチルァミノ)ベンゾフエノンが好ましい。  [0124] Specific examples of the amine-based hydrogen donor include 4, 4 'bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone, 4, 4'-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone, 4-jetylaminoacetophenone, 4- Examples include dimethylaminopropiophenone, ethyl 4-dimethylaminobenzoate, 4-dimethylaminobenzoic acid, 4-dimethylaminobenzozotolyl and the like. Of these, 4,4′-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone and 4,4′-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone are preferable, and 4,4′-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone is particularly preferable.
[0125] 前記水素供与体は、一種単独で又は 2種以上を混合して使用することができる。  [0125] The hydrogen donors can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
水素供与体は、形成された画像が現像時に基板上から脱落し難ぐかつ強度及び 感度をも向上させ得る点で、 1種以上のメルカブタン系水素供与体と 1種以上のアミ ン系水素供与体とを組合せて使用することが好まし 、。  A hydrogen donor is one or more mercabtan hydrogen donors and one or more amine hydrogen donors because the formed image is less likely to fall off the substrate during development and can also improve strength and sensitivity. It is preferred to use in combination with the body.
[0126] 前記メルカブタン系水素供与体とアミン系水素供与体との組合せの具体例としては 、 2 メルカプトべンゾチアゾール Z4, 4 '—ビス(ジメチルァミノ)ベンゾフエノン、 2— メルカプトべンゾチアゾール Z4, 4 '—ビス(ジェチルァミノ)ベンゾフエノン、 2 メル カプトべンゾォキサゾール Z4, 4 '—ビス(ジメチルァミノ)ベンゾフエノン、 2 メルカ ブトべンゾォキサゾール Z4, 4'—ビス(ジェチルァミノ)ベンゾフエノン等が挙げられ る。より好ましい組合せは、 2 メルカプトべンゾチアゾール /4, 4 '—ビス(ジェチル ァミノ)ベンゾフエノン、 2 メルカプトべンゾォキサゾール Z4, 4 '—ビス(ジェチルァ ミノ)ベンゾフエノンであり、特に好ましい組合せは、 2—メルカプトべンゾチアゾール /4, 4' ビス(ジェチルァミノ)ベンゾフエノンである。  [0126] Specific examples of the combination of the mercabtan based hydrogen donor and the amine based hydrogen donor include 2 mercaptobenzothiazole Z4, 4'-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole Z4, 4'-bis (Jetylamino) benzophenone, 2 mercaptobenzoxazole Z4,4'-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone, 2mercaptobenzoxazole Z4,4'-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone, and the like. A more preferred combination is 2 mercaptobenzothiazole / 4,4'-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone, 2mercaptobenzoxazole Z4,4'-bis (jetylamino) benzophenone, and a particularly preferred combination is 2-mercaptobenzozothiazole / 4, 4 'Bis (jetylamino) benzophenone.
[0127] 前記メルカブタン系水素供与体とアミン系水素供与体とを組合せた場合の、メルカ ブタン系水素供与体 (M)とァミン系水素供与体 (A)との質量比 (M : A)は、通常 1: 1 〜1 :4が好ましぐ 1 : 1〜1 : 3がより好ましい。 [0127] Merca when the mercabtan-based hydrogen donor and the amine-based hydrogen donor are combined. The mass ratio (M: A) of the butane-based hydrogen donor (M) to the amine-based hydrogen donor (A) is usually preferably 1: 1 to 1: 4, more preferably 1: 1 to 1: 3. .
前記水素供与体の感光性榭脂層又は濃色組成物中における総量としては、層又 は組成物の全固形分 (質量)に対して、 0. 1〜20質量%が好ましぐ 0. 5〜: LO質量 %が特に好ましい。  The total amount of the hydrogen donor in the photosensitive resin layer or dark composition is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass relative to the total solid content (mass) of the layer or composition. 5-: LO mass% is particularly preferred.
[0128] 一色材ー [0128] One color material
濃色離画壁形成用の感光性榭脂層又は濃色組成物は、色材の少なくとも一種を 含有するのが好ましい。色材を含有することにより、所望色よりなる可視画像を形成 することができる。  The photosensitive resin layer or dark color composition for forming a dark color separation wall preferably contains at least one colorant. By containing a color material, a visible image having a desired color can be formed.
[0129] 色材としては、特開 2005— 17716号公報の段落番号 [0038]〜[0054]に記載 の顔料及び染料や、特開 2004 - 361447号公報の段落番号 [0068]〜 [0072]に 記載の顔料や、特開 2005— 17521号公報の段落番号 [0080]〜 [0088]に記載 の着色剤を好適に用いることができる。  [0129] Examples of the color material include pigments and dyes described in paragraphs [0038] to [0054] of JP-A-2005-17716, and paragraphs [0068] to [0072] of JP-A-2004-361447. And the colorants described in paragraph numbers [0080] to [0088] of JP-A-2005-17521 can be suitably used.
[0130] 中でも、色材としては、有機顔料、無機顔料、染料等を好適である。また、感光性榭 脂層又は濃色組成物に遮光性が要求される場合は、色材として、カーボンブラック、 チタンカーボン、酸化チタン、 4酸化鉄等の金属酸化物粉、金属硫化物粉、金属粉 などの遮光剤、並びに赤、青、緑色等の顔料の混合物等を用いることができる。公知 の着色剤 (染料、顔料)を使用することができる。黒色の色材の例としては、カーボン ブラック、チタンカーボン、酸化鉄、酸化チタン、黒鉛などが好適に挙げられ、特に力 一ボンブラックが好ましい。  Of these, organic pigments, inorganic pigments, dyes, and the like are suitable as the color material. Further, when light-shielding properties are required for the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition, as a coloring material, metal oxide powder such as carbon black, titanium carbon, titanium oxide, iron tetroxide, metal sulfide powder, A light-shielding agent such as metal powder, and a mixture of pigments such as red, blue, and green can be used. Known colorants (dyes, pigments) can be used. Examples of black color materials include carbon black, titanium carbon, iron oxide, titanium oxide, graphite, and the like.
また、色材として顔料を選択する場合は、感光性榭脂層又は濃色組成物中に均一 に分散されることが好まし 、。  When a pigment is selected as the color material, it is preferable that the pigment is uniformly dispersed in the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition.
[0131] 色材の感光性榭脂層又は濃色組成物中における含有量としては、層又は組成物 の固形分 (質量)に対して、現像時間を短縮する点で、 30〜70質量%が好ましぐ 4 0〜60質量%がより好ましぐ 50〜55質量%が更に好ましい。  [0131] The content of the coloring material in the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition is 30 to 70% by mass in terms of shortening the development time with respect to the solid content (mass) of the layer or composition. 40-60% by mass is more preferable 50-55% by mass is more preferable.
[0132] 前記顔料は、分散液として使用することが望ましい。この分散液は、前記顔料と顔 料分散剤とを予め混合して得られる組成物を、後述する有機溶媒 (又はビヒクル)に 添加して分散させることによって調製することができる。前記ビビクルとは、塗料が液 体状態にあるときに顔料を分散させて 、る媒質の部分を 、 、、液状であって前記顔 料と結合して塗膜を固める部分 (バインダー)と、これを溶解希釈する成分 (有機溶媒 )とを含む。前記顔料を分散させる際に用いる分散機としては、特に制限はなぐ例え ば、「顔料の事典」〔朝倉邦造著、第一版、 438頁、朝倉書店 (2000年)〕に記載の、 ニーダー、ローノレミノレ、アトライダー、スーパーミノレ、ディゾノレノ 、ホモミキサー、サンド ミル等の公知の分散機が挙げられる。さらに、「顔料の事典」の 310頁に記載の機械 的摩砕により摩擦力を利用し、微粉砕するようにしてもよい。 [0132] The pigment is desirably used as a dispersion. This dispersion can be prepared by adding and dispersing a composition obtained by previously mixing the pigment and the pigment dispersant in an organic solvent (or vehicle) described later. The vehicle is a paint liquid. The part of the medium in which the pigment is dispersed when in the body state is a liquid part that binds to the above-mentioned pigment and hardens the coating film (binder), and a component that dissolves and dilutes this (organic solvent) ). Examples of the disperser used when dispersing the pigment include, but are not particularly limited to, a kneader described in “Encyclopedia of Pigments” (Asakura Kunizo, 1st edition, page 438, Asakura Shoten (2000)). Well-known dispersers such as Ronore Lenore, Atridor, Super Minore, Dizonoleno, Homomixer, Sand Mill and the like can be mentioned. Further, it may be finely pulverized by using frictional force by mechanical grinding described on page 310 of “Encyclopedia of Pigments”.
[0133] 色材 (特に顔料)の粒子径としては、分散安定性の観点から、数平均粒径で 0. 00 1〜0. 1 111カ 子ましく、 0. 01〜0. 08 /z m力より好まし!/ヽ。なお、「粒子径」とは、粒 子を電子顕微鏡写真における該粒子の面積と同面積の円で表したときの直径をいう 。「数平均粒径」とは、複数の粒子の粒子径の 100個の平均値をいう。  [0133] From the viewpoint of dispersion stability, the number average particle diameter of the coloring material (particularly pigment) is 0.001 to 0.1111, preferably 0.01 to 0.08 / zm. Better than power! / ヽ. The “particle diameter” refers to the diameter when the particles are represented by a circle having the same area as the area of the particles in the electron micrograph. “Number average particle size” means an average value of 100 particles of a plurality of particles.
[0134] バインダ  [0134] Binder
濃色離画壁形成用の感光性榭脂層又は濃色組成物は、バインダーの少なくとも一 種を用いて構成することができる。  The photosensitive resin layer or dark color composition for forming a dark color separation image wall can be constituted using at least one binder.
ノインダ一としては、側鎖にカルボン酸基やカルボン酸塩基などの極性基を有する ポリマーが好ましい。その例としては、特開昭 59— 44615号公報、特公昭 54— 343 27号公報、特公昭 58— 12577号公報、特公昭 54— 25957号公報、特開昭 59— 5 3836号公報、及び特開昭 59— 71048号公報に記載の、メタクリル酸共重合体、ァ クリル酸共重合体、ィタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、 部分エステルイ匕マレイン酸共重合体、等を挙げることができる。  As the noinder, a polymer having a polar group such as a carboxylic acid group or a carboxylic acid group in the side chain is preferable. Examples thereof include JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12577, JP-B-54-25957, JP-A-59-53836, and As described in JP-A-59-71048, methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, partial ester oxalic maleic acid copolymer And the like.
[0135] また、側鎖にカルボン酸基を有するセルロース誘導体も挙げられる。さらに、水酸基 を有するポリマーに環状酸無水物を付加したものも好ましく使用できる。  [0135] In addition, cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain may also be mentioned. Furthermore, what added the cyclic acid anhydride to the polymer which has a hydroxyl group can also be used preferably.
特に好ましい例として、米国特許第 4139391号明細書に記載のベンジル (メタ)ァ タリレートと (メタ)アクリル酸との共重合体や、ベンジル (メタ)アタリレートと (メタ)アタリ ル酸と他のモノマーとの多元共重合体を挙げることができる。これらの極性基を有す るバインダーは、一種単独で用いてもよいし、通常の膜形成性のポリマーと併用する 組成物の状態で使用するようにしてもよ!、。  Particularly preferred examples include copolymers of benzyl (meth) atalylate and (meth) acrylic acid described in US Pat. No. 4,139,391, benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylate, and other Mention may be made of multicomponent copolymers with monomers. These binders having a polar group may be used singly or may be used in the state of a composition used in combination with an ordinary film-forming polymer!
[0136] バインダーの感光性榭脂層又は濃色組成物中における含有量としては、層又は組 成物の全固形分 (質量)に対して、 20〜50質量%が好ましぐ 25〜45質量%がより 好ましい。 [0136] The content of the binder in the photosensitive resin layer or the dark color composition includes a layer or a set. 20 to 50% by mass is preferable with respect to the total solid content (mass) of the composition, and 25 to 45% by mass is more preferable.
[0137] 一有機溶剤 [0137] One organic solvent
本発明における濃色離画壁を作製する際に用いる濃色組成物は、一般に前記成 分以外に、有機溶剤を用いて構成することができる。有機溶剤の例としては、メチル ェチノレケトン、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメ チルエーテルアセテート、シクロへキサノン、シクロへキサノール、メチルイソブチルケ トン、乳酸ェチル、乳酸メチル、力プロラタタム等が挙げられる。  In general, the dark color composition used for producing the dark color separation wall in the present invention can be constituted using an organic solvent in addition to the above components. Examples of the organic solvent include methyl ethinoleketone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, cyclohexanone, cyclohexanol, methyl isobutyl ketone, ethyl lactate, methyl lactate, and strength prolatatum.
[0138] 他の成分 [0138] Other ingredients
本発明における濃色組成物又は感光性榭脂層には、さらに下記成分、例えば界面 活性剤、紫外線吸収剤、並びに公知の添加剤、例えば、可塑剤、充填剤、安定化剤 、熱重合防止剤、溶剤、密着促進剤等を含有させることができる。さらに、濃色組成 物は少なくとも 150°C以下の温度で軟化もしくは粘着性になることが好ましぐ熱可塑 性であることが好ましい。かかる観点からは、相溶性の可塑剤を添加することで改質 することができる。  In the dark color composition or photosensitive resin layer in the present invention, the following components, for example, surfactant, ultraviolet absorber, and known additives such as plasticizer, filler, stabilizer, thermal polymerization prevention An agent, a solvent, an adhesion promoter and the like can be contained. Furthermore, it is preferred that the dark color composition is a thermoplastic which preferably becomes soft or tacky at a temperature of at least 150 ° C. From this point of view, it can be modified by adding a compatible plasticizer.
[0139] 〈界面活性剤〉 [0139] <Surfactant>
濃色組成物を基板上又は後述の感光性転写材料の仮支持体上に塗布する場合 には、濃色組成物中に界面活性剤を含有させることで、均一な膜厚に制御でき、塗 布ムラを効果的に防止することができる。界面活性剤としては、特開 2003— 33742 4号公報、特開平 11— 133600号公報に記載の界面活性剤が好適に挙げられる。 なお、界面活性剤の濃色組成物中における含有量としては、該組成物の全固形分( 質量)に対して、 0. 001〜1質量%が一般的であり、 0. 01〜0. 5質量%が好ましぐ 0. 03〜0. 3質量%が特に好ましい。  When the dark color composition is applied on a substrate or a temporary support of a photosensitive transfer material described later, a uniform film thickness can be controlled by including a surfactant in the dark color composition. Cloth unevenness can be effectively prevented. Preferred examples of the surfactant include surfactants described in JP-A No. 2003-337742 and JP-A No. 11-133600. The content of the surfactant in the dark color composition is generally 0.001 to 1% by mass with respect to the total solid content (mass) of the composition, and 0.01 to 0. 5% by mass is preferred 0.03 to 0.3% by mass is particularly preferred.
[0140] 〈紫外線吸収剤〉 [0140] <Ultraviolet absorber>
濃色組成物には、必要に応じて紫外線吸収剤を含有することができる。 紫外線吸収剤としては、特開平 5— 72724号公報に記載の化合物、並びにサリシ レート系、ベンゾフエノン系、ベンゾトリアゾール系、シァノアクリレート系、ニッケルキ レート系、ヒンダードアミン系等の化合物が挙げられる。 [0141] 例えば、フエ-ルサリシレート、 4 t—ブチルフエ-ルサリシレート、 2, 4ージー t— ブチルフエ-ルー 3', 5'—ジ一 t— 4'—ヒドロキシベンゾエート、 4— t—ブチルフエ- ルサリシレート、 2, 4ージヒドロキシベンゾフエノン、 2 ヒドロキシー4ーメトキシベンゾ フエノン、 2 ヒドロキシ一 4— n—オタトキシベンゾフエノン、 2— (2'—ヒドロキシ一 5' メチルフエニル)ベンゾトリァゾール、 2—(2' ヒドロキシ 3'—t—ブチルー 5'—メ チルフエ-ル) 5 クロ口べンゾトリァゾール、ェチル 2 シァノ 3, 3 ジ一フエ -ルアタリレート、 2, 2' ヒドロキシー4ーメトキシベンゾフエノン、ニッケルジブチルジ チォカーバメート、ビス(2, 2, 6, 6—テトラメチルー 4 ピリジン) セバケート、 4—t ブチルフエ-ルサリシレート、サルチル酸フエ-ル、 4ーヒドロキシ 2, 2, 6, 6— テトラメチルピペリジン縮合物、コハク酸一ビス(2, 2, 6, 6—テトラメチルー 4ーピペリ デュル) -エステル、 2— [ 2 ヒドロキシ— 3 , 5 ビス( α , a -ジメチルベンジル)フ ェ -ル] - 2H-ベンゾトリァゾール、 7— { [4 クロ口 6 (ジェチルァミノ) 5 ト リアジン一 2—ィル]アミノ} 3 フエ-ルクマリン等が挙げられる。 The dark color composition may contain an ultraviolet absorber as necessary. Examples of the ultraviolet absorber include compounds described in JP-A-5-72724, and compounds such as salicylate, benzophenone, benzotriazole, cyanoacrylate, nickel chelate, and hindered amine. [0141] For example, phenyl salicylate, 4 t-butyl ferric salicylate, 2, 4-ji t-butyl ferrule 3 ', 5'-di-t- 4'-hydroxybenzoate, 4-t-butyl phenol Salicylate, 2,4-Dihydroxybenzophenone, 2 Hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone, 2 Hydroxy 4-n-Otoxybenzophenone, 2- (2'-Hydroxy-5'-methylphenyl) benzotriazole, 2- (2 'Hydroxy 3'—t-butyl-5'-methylphenol) 5 Chronobenzobenzolazole, Ethyl 2 Cyan 3,3 Di-di-phthalate, 2, 2' Hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone, Nickel dibutyl Dithiocarbamate, bis (2, 2, 6, 6-tetramethyl-4-pyridine) sebacate, 4-t butylphenol salicylate, salicylate, 4-hydroxy 2, 2, 6, 6— Tetramethylpiperidine condensate, bis (2, 2, 6, 6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) -ester, 2— [2 Hydroxy-3,5 bis (α, a- Dimethylbenzyl) phenyl] -2H-benzotriazole, 7- {[4 black mouth 6 (jetylamino) 5 triazine-2-yl] amino} 3 phenol coumarin, and the like.
紫外線吸収剤を用いる場合の、濃色組成物の全固形分に対する紫外線吸収剤の 含有量としては 0. 5〜15質量%が一般的であり、 1〜12質量%が好ましぐ 1. 2〜1 0質量%が特に好ましい。  In the case of using an ultraviolet absorber, the content of the ultraviolet absorber with respect to the total solid content of the dark color composition is generally 0.5 to 15% by mass, and preferably 1 to 12% by mass. ˜10 mass% is particularly preferred.
[0142] 〈熱重合防止剤〉  [0142] <Thermal polymerization inhibitor>
濃色組成物には、熱重合防止剤を含むことが好ましい。熱重合防止剤の例として は、ハイドロキノン、ハイドロキノンモノメチルエーテル、 p—メトキシフエノール、ジ一 t ーブチルー ρ クレゾール、ピロガロール、 tーブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、 4, 4 '一チォビス(3—メチルー 6 t—ブチルフエノール)、 2, 2'—メチレンビス(4ーメチ ルー 6 t—ブチルフエノール)、 2 メルカプトべンズイミダゾール、フエノチアジン等 が挙げられる。  The dark composition preferably contains a thermal polymerization inhibitor. Examples of thermal polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, hydroquinone monomethyl ether, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-ρ-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butyl Phenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl 6t-butylphenol), 2 mercaptobenzimidazole, phenothiazine and the like.
熱重合防止剤を用いる場合の、濃色組成物の全固形分に対する含有量としては 0 . 01〜1質量0 /0力 S—般的であり、 0. 02〜0. 7質量0 /0力 S好ましく、 0. 05〜0. 5質量 %が特に好ましい。 In the case of using a thermal polymerization inhibitor, the content relative to the total solids in the dark composition 0. A 01-1 mass 0/0 power S- general, from 0.02 to 0.7 mass 0/0 Force S is preferable, and 0.05 to 0.5% by mass is particularly preferable.
[0143] また、濃色組成物には、前記成分以外に、特開平 11— 133600号公報に記載の「 接着助剤」やその他の添加剤等を含有させることもできる。 [0144] 〜感光性転写材料〜 [0143] In addition to the above components, the dark color composition may contain "adhesion aid" described in JP-A-11-133600, other additives, and the like. [0144] -Photosensitive transfer material-
次に、前記転写法に用いる感光性転写材料につ!、て詳述する。  Next, the photosensitive transfer material used in the transfer method will be described in detail.
感光性転写材料は、仮支持体上に、少なくとも前記濃色組成物を用いて構成され た感光性榭脂層を設けて構成されたもの、好ましくは仮支持体側カゝら酸素遮断層と 感光性榭脂層とを設けて構成されたものを用いることができる。感光性榭脂層上に酸 素遮断層が設けられた材料を用いた場合は、濃色組成物カゝらなる感光性榭脂層は、 酸素遮断層により大気中の酸素力 保護されるため自動的に貧酸素条件下となる。 そのため、露光する工程を不活性ガス下や減圧下で行なう必要がなぐ現状の工程 をそのまま利用できる利点がある。また、濃色離画壁を容易かつ低コストに形成し得 る点でも有効である。  The photosensitive transfer material is formed by providing a photosensitive resin layer composed of at least the dark color composition on a temporary support, preferably an oxygen barrier layer and a photosensitive layer on the temporary support side. What was provided and provided with the characteristic rosin layer can be used. When a material having an oxygen blocking layer provided on the photosensitive resin layer is used, the photosensitive resin layer made of the dark color composition is protected by the oxygen blocking layer in the atmosphere. It automatically becomes an anoxic condition. Therefore, there is an advantage that the current process which does not need to be performed under an inert gas or under reduced pressure can be used as it is. It is also effective in that a dark color separation wall can be formed easily and at low cost.
[0145] 感光性転写材料は、必要に応じて更に、熱可塑性榭脂層や保護フィルムなどを設 けて構成することができる。  [0145] The photosensitive transfer material can be further provided with a thermoplastic resin layer, a protective film or the like, if necessary.
[0146] 仮支持体  [0146] Temporary support
仮支持体としては、化学的及び熱的に安定であって可撓性の物質で構成されるも のから適宜選択することができる。具体的には、テフロン (登録商標)、ポリエチレンテ レフタレート、ポリカーボネート、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリエステル等、薄い シートもしくはフィルム又はこれらの積層体が好ましい。中でも、 2軸延伸ポリエチレン テレフタレートフィルムが特に好まし 、。  The temporary support can be appropriately selected from those that are chemically and thermally stable and made of a flexible material. Specifically, a thin sheet or film such as Teflon (registered trademark), polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyester, or a laminate thereof is preferable. Of these, biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferred.
[0147] 仮支持体の厚みとしては、 5〜300 μ mが適当であり、好ましくは 20〜150 μ mで ある。厚みが前記範囲内であると、仮支持体の剥離時における破れを回避でき、仮 支持体を介して露光したときの解像度の低下を回避することができる。 [0147] The thickness of the temporary support is suitably 5 to 300 µm, preferably 20 to 150 µm. When the thickness is within the above range, it is possible to avoid tearing at the time of peeling of the temporary support, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in resolution when exposed through the temporary support.
[0148] 感光性榭脂層  [0148] Photosensitive resin layer
感光性榭脂層は、既述の濃色組成物を用いてなり、形状等の特性や形成方法等 につ 、ては既述の塗布法で塗布形成される層と同様であり、好ま ヽ態様も同様で ある。  The photosensitive resin layer is composed of the above-described dark-colored composition, and is similar to the layer formed by the above-described coating method in terms of properties such as shape and formation method. The aspect is also the same.
[0149] 酸素遮断層  [0149] Oxygen barrier
仮支持体と感光性榭脂層との間、あるいは熱可塑性榭脂層と感光性榭脂層との間 には、酸素遮断層を更に設けることが好ましい。酸素遮断層とは、 2000cmV (m2- dayatm)以下の酸素透過率を有する層であり、酸素透過率は 100cm3Z (m2 · day • atm)以下であることが好ましく、 50cm3Z (m2 · dayatm)以下であることがより好ま LV、。酸素透過率が 2000cm3Z (m2 · day · atm)より多 、場合は効率的に酸素を遮 断することができずに所望形状の濃色離画壁が得られないことがある。 It is preferable to further provide an oxygen barrier layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin layer or between the thermoplastic resin layer and the photosensitive resin layer. The oxygen barrier layer is 2000cmV (m 2- dayatm) or less, and the oxygen permeability is preferably 100 cm 3 Z (m 2 · day • atm) or less, more preferably 50 cm 3 Z (m 2 · dayatm) or less. LV preferred. If the oxygen permeability is higher than 2000 cm 3 Z (m 2 · day · atm), oxygen may not be effectively cut off and a dark color separation wall having a desired shape may not be obtained.
[0150] 酸素遮断層を形成する榭脂材料の具体的な例として、特開昭 46— 2121号ゃ特公 昭 56 40824号の各公報〖こ記載の、ポリビュルエーテル Z無水マレイン酸重合体 、カルボキシアルキルセルロースの水溶性塩、水溶性セルロースエーテル類、カルボ キシアルキル澱粉の水溶性塩、ポリビュルアルコール、ポリビュルピロリドン、各種の ポリアクリルアミド類、各種の水溶性ポリアミド、ポリアクリル酸の水溶性塩、ゼラチン、 エチレンオキサイド重合体、各種の澱粉およびその類似物からなる群の水溶性塩、 スチレン Zマレイン酸の共重合体、マレイネート榭脂、及びこれらの二種以上の組合 せ等が挙げられる。 [0150] As specific examples of the resin material for forming the oxygen barrier layer, the polybutyl ether Z maleic anhydride polymer described in JP-A-46-2121 and JP-B-56-40824 , Water-soluble salts of carboxyalkyl cellulose, water-soluble cellulose ethers, water-soluble salts of carboxyalkyl starch, polybutyl alcohol, polybulur pyrrolidone, various polyacrylamides, various water-soluble polyamides, water-soluble salts of polyacrylic acid , Gelatin, ethylene oxide polymers, water-soluble salts of the group consisting of various starches and the like, copolymers of styrene Z maleic acid, maleate resin, and combinations of two or more thereof.
[0151] 酸素遮断層としては、ポリエチレン、ポリ塩ィ匕ビユリデン、ポリビニルアルコール (PV A)などを主成分 (特に PVAを主成分)とした層が好ましぐ必要に応じてポリビニルビ 口リドン、ポリアクリルアミド等のポリマーを添カ卩してもよぐポリビュルアルコールとポリ ビュルピロリドンとの組合せが特に好ましい。 PVAとしては、酸化率が 80%以上であ るものが好ましい。ポリビニルピロリドンの含有量は酸素遮断層の全固形分の 1〜75 質量%が好ましぐより好ましくは 1〜50質量%、更に好ましくは 10〜40質量%であ る。酸素遮断層中における PVAの含有量は、 25〜99質量%が好ましぐ 50〜90質 量%がより好ましぐ 50〜80質量%が特に好ましい。  [0151] As the oxygen barrier layer, a layer mainly composed of polyethylene, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl alcohol (PV A), etc. (especially PVA as a main component) is preferred. A combination of polybulal alcohol and polypyrrole pyrrolidone, which may be added with a polymer such as acrylamide, is particularly preferred. PVA having an oxidation rate of 80% or more is preferable. The content of polyvinylpyrrolidone is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass, more preferably 1 to 75% by mass of the total solid content of the oxygen barrier layer. The content of PVA in the oxygen barrier layer is particularly preferably 50 to 80% by mass, more preferably 50 to 90% by mass, and more preferably 50 to 90% by mass.
上記の榭脂材料の添加量は、層全体の 1〜40質量%、より好ましくは 10〜35質量 %である。なお、ポリビニルピロリドンの添加量が多すぎると酸素遮断性が不充分に なる場合がある。  The amount of the above-mentioned resin material added is 1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 10 to 35% by mass, based on the entire layer. If the amount of polyvinyl pyrrolidone added is too large, oxygen barrier properties may be insufficient.
[0152] 熱可塑性榭脂層  [0152] Thermoplastic resin layer
仮支持体と感光性榭脂層との間には、必要に応じて熱可塑性榭脂層を設けること ができる。熱可塑性榭脂層を設けると、濃色離画壁が形成される基板との密着性を 向上させるのに有効である。  A thermoplastic resin layer can be provided between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin layer as required. Providing a thermoplastic resin layer is effective in improving the adhesion to the substrate on which the dark color separation wall is formed.
[0153] 熱可塑性榭脂層は、少なくとも榭脂成分を含み、アルカリ可溶性に構成されること が好ましい。榭脂成分としては、アルカリ可溶性であって、実質的な軟ィ匕点が 80°C以 下である熱可塑性榭脂が好まし 、。 [0153] The thermoplastic resin layer should contain at least a resin component and be alkali-soluble. Is preferred. As the resin component, a thermoplastic resin that is alkali-soluble and has a substantially soft softness point of 80 ° C or less is preferable.
軟ィ匕点が 80°C以下のアルカリ可溶性の熱可塑性榭脂としては、例えば、エチレン とアクリル酸エステル共重合体とのケン化物、スチレンと (メタ)アクリル酸エステル共 重合体とのケン化物、ビュルトルエンと (メタ)アクリル酸エステル共重合体とのケンィ匕 物、ポリ (メタ)アクリル酸エステル、(メタ)アクリル酸ブチルと酢酸ビニル等の (メタ)ァ クリル酸エステル共重合体などとのケンィ匕物、等が挙げられる。  Examples of alkali-soluble thermoplastic resins having a soft softness point of 80 ° C or lower include saponified products of ethylene and acrylate copolymers, and saponified products of styrene and (meth) acrylate copolymers. , Kento compound of butyltoluene and (meth) acrylic acid ester copolymer, poly (meth) acrylic acid ester, (meth) acrylic acid ester copolymer such as (meth) acrylic acid butyl and vinyl acetate Keny's food, etc.
[0154] 上記以外に更に、「プラスチック性能便覧」(日本プラスチック工業連盟、全日本プ ラスチック成形工業連合会編著、工業調査会発行、 1968年 10月 25日発行)におけ る、軟ィ匕点が約 80°C以下の有機高分子のうち、アルカリ水溶液に可溶なものも使用 できる。  [0154] In addition to the above, there is a soft score in the “Plastic Performance Handbook” (edited by the Japan Plastics Industry Federation, edited by the All Japan Plastics Molding Industry Association, published by the Industrial Research Council, published on October 25, 1968). Among organic polymers of about 80 ° C or less, those soluble in an alkaline aqueous solution can be used.
[0155] また、軟ィ匕点が 80°C以上の有機高分子物質も、その有機高分子物質中に該高分 子物質と相溶性のある各種可塑剤を添加することで、実質的な軟ィ匕点を 80°C以下 に下げて用いることもできる。  [0155] In addition, an organic polymer substance having a soft spot of 80 ° C or higher can be substantially added by adding various plasticizers compatible with the polymer substance to the organic polymer substance. The soft saddle point can be lowered to 80 ° C or lower.
これらの有機高分子物質には、仮支持体との接着力を調節する目的で、実質的な 軟ィ匕点が 80°Cを越えない範囲で、各種ポリマーや過冷却物質、密着改良剤あるい は界面活性剤、離型剤、等を加えることもできる。好ましい可塑剤の具体例としては、 ポリプロピレングリコール、ポリエチレングリコール、ジォクチルフタレート、ジへプチノレ フタレート、ジブチルフタレート、トリクレジルフォスフェート、クレジルジフエ-ルフォス フェート、ビフエ-ルジフエ-ルフォスフェートを挙げることができる。  These organic polymer substances include various polymers, supercooled substances, and adhesion improvers within the range where the effective soft spot does not exceed 80 ° C for the purpose of adjusting the adhesive strength with the temporary support. Alternatively, a surfactant, a release agent, etc. can be added. Specific examples of preferable plasticizers include polypropylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, dioctyl phthalate, diheptino phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, cresyl diphosphate, biphenyl diphosphate. it can.
[0156] 一保護フイノレム [0156] One Protection Finolem
仮支持体上に形成された感光性榭脂層の表面には、貯蔵の際の汚染や損傷から 保護するために、保護フィルムを設けることが好ましい。保護フィルムは、仮支持体と 同一もしくは類似の材料で構成されてもよぐ転写を良好に行なう点で感光性榭脂層 力 の分離が容易に行なえるものであることが重要である。  A protective film is preferably provided on the surface of the photosensitive resin layer formed on the temporary support in order to protect it from contamination and damage during storage. It is important that the protective film can be easily separated from the photosensitive resin layer force in that it can be made of the same or similar material as that of the temporary support and can perform transfer well.
保護フィルムを構成する材料としては、例えば、シリコーン紙、ポリオレフインもしくは ポリテトラフルォロエチレンシートが適当である。保護フィルムの厚みは、 4~40 μ m が一般的であり、 5〜30 m力 S好ましく、 10〜25 mが特に好ましい。 [0157] 感光性転写材料は、例えば次のようにして作製することができる。例えば、仮支持 体上に熱可塑性榭脂層の構成成分を溶解した塗布液 (熱可塑性榭脂層用塗布液) を塗布し、乾燥させることにより熱可塑性榭脂層を設ける。この熱可塑性榭脂層上に 熱可塑性榭脂層を溶解しない溶剤を用いてなる溶液を塗布し、乾燥させて中間層を 積層する。その後、更に中間層上に、中間層を溶解しない溶剤を用いて既述のよう に調製された濃色組成物を塗布し、乾燥させて感光性榭脂層を積層する。 As a material constituting the protective film, for example, silicone paper, polyolefin, or polytetrafluoroethylene sheet is suitable. The thickness of the protective film is generally 4 to 40 μm, preferably 5 to 30 m force S, particularly preferably 10 to 25 m. [0157] The photosensitive transfer material can be produced, for example, as follows. For example, a thermoplastic resin layer is provided by applying a coating solution (thermoplastic resin layer coating solution) in which the components of the thermoplastic resin layer are dissolved on a temporary support and drying. On this thermoplastic resin layer, a solution using a solvent that does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer is applied and dried to laminate an intermediate layer. Thereafter, a dark color composition prepared as described above is further applied onto the intermediate layer using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer, and dried to laminate a photosensitive resin layer.
なお、塗布は、既述の公知の塗布方法により行なえる力 スリット状ノズルを用いた 塗布装置 (スリットコータ)を用いて行なうことが好ましい。  The coating is preferably performed using a coating device (slit coater) using a slit-like nozzle that can be applied by the known coating method described above.
[0158] 感光性転写材料の作製は、上記以外に、仮支持体上に熱可塑性榭脂層及び中間 層を設けたシートと、保護フィルム上に感光性榭脂層を設けたシートとを用意し、酸 素遮断層と感光性榭脂層とが接するように貼り合わせることにより行なうことができ、ま た、仮支持体上に熱可塑性榭脂層を有するシートと、保護フィルム上に感光性榭脂 層及び中間層を有するシートとを用意し、熱可塑性榭脂層と中間層とが接するように 貼り合わせることにより行なうことができる。  [0158] In addition to the above, the photosensitive transfer material is prepared by preparing a sheet provided with a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate layer on a temporary support, and a sheet provided with a photosensitive resin layer on a protective film. In addition, the oxygen blocking layer and the photosensitive resin layer can be bonded to each other, and the sheet having the thermoplastic resin layer on the temporary support and the photosensitive film on the protective film can be used. A sheet having a resin layer and an intermediate layer is prepared, and the sheet is bonded so that the thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other.
[0159] 一基板  [0159] One board
基板 (永久支持体)としては、金属の基材、金属を貼り合わせた基材、ガラス、セラミ ック、合成樹脂フィルム等が挙げられる。好ましくは、透明性で寸度安定性の良好な もの、特にガラスや合成樹脂フィルムである。  Examples of the substrate (permanent support) include a metal base material, a base material bonded with metal, glass, ceramic, a synthetic resin film, and the like. Preferred are those that are transparent and have good dimensional stability, especially glass and synthetic resin films.
[0160] [露光、現像] [0160] [Exposure, development]
上記のようにして形成された感光性榭脂層の露光は、所望のパターンが設けられた マスクを用い、マスクを通して感光性榭脂層に光を照射することにより行なえる。この とき、露光は貧酸素条件下で行なうことが好ましい。貧酸素条件は、例えば、感光性 榭脂層の上に酸素遮断し得る層(例えば、酸素遮断層又は感光性転写材料を用い る場合は露光時に除去せずに残した仮支持体)を設けることにより、あるいは不活性 ガス雰囲気又は減圧雰囲気とすることにより形成することができる。中でも、不活性ガ ス雰囲気又は減圧雰囲気に調整して形成した貧酸素条件下で露光するのが好まし い。  Exposure of the photosensitive resin layer formed as described above can be performed by irradiating the photosensitive resin layer with light through a mask using a mask provided with a desired pattern. At this time, the exposure is preferably performed under an anoxic condition. For example, a layer capable of blocking oxygen (for example, an oxygen blocking layer or a temporary support left without being removed at the time of exposure when a photosensitive transfer material is used) is provided on the photosensitive resin layer. Or by using an inert gas atmosphere or a reduced-pressure atmosphere. Among these, exposure is preferably performed under an anoxic condition formed by adjusting to an inert gas atmosphere or a reduced pressure atmosphere.
[0161] 貧酸素条件下とは、不活性ガス雰囲気下、減圧下、酸素を遮断し得る層下などをさ す。 [0161] Hypoxic conditions include an inert gas atmosphere, a reduced pressure, and a layer that can block oxygen. The
前記不活性ガスとは、 N、 H、 COなどの一般的な気体や、 He、 Ne、 Arなどの希  The inert gas is a general gas such as N, H, or CO, or a rare gas such as He, Ne, or Ar.
2 2 2  2 2 2
ガス類をいう。この中でも、安全性や入手の容易さ、コストの点から、 Nが好適である  Gases. Among these, N is preferable in terms of safety, availability, and cost.
2 前記減圧下とは、 500hPa以下、好ましくは lOOhPa以下の状態をさす。 また、前記酸素遮断し得る層としては、既述の感光性転写材料における酸素遮断 層及び、各種フィルムを適用することができ、例えばポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET )をはじめとするポリエステル類、ナイロンをはじめとするポリアミド類、エチレン-酢酸 ビニル共重合体 (EVA類)も好適である。これらフィルムは、必要に応じて延伸された ものでもよく、厚みは 5〜300 μ mが適当であり、好ましくは 20〜150 μ mである。感 光性転写材料を用いて濃色離画壁を作製する場合は、仮支持体及び Z又は酸素遮 断層を感光性榭脂層上に設けた状態とすることで貧酸素条件が形成される。  2 The reduced pressure refers to a state of 500 hPa or less, preferably lOOhPa or less. Further, as the layer capable of blocking oxygen, the oxygen blocking layer in the above-described photosensitive transfer material and various films can be applied, for example, polyesters including polyethylene terephthalate (PET), nylon and the like. Also suitable are polyamides and ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers (EVAs). These films may be stretched as necessary, and the thickness is suitably 5 to 300 μm, preferably 20 to 150 μm. When producing a dark color separation wall using a light-sensitive transfer material, the hypoxic condition is formed by placing the temporary support and Z or oxygen barrier on the photosensitive resin layer. .
[0162] 露光には、例えば、超高圧水銀灯を備えたプロキシミティー型露光機 (例えば、日 立ハイテク電子エンジニアリング (株)製)等を用いることができる。また、光源としては 、中圧〜超高圧水銀灯、キセノンランプ、メタルノヽライドランプ等が挙げられる。  [0162] For the exposure, for example, a proximity type exposure machine (for example, manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Electronics Engineering Co., Ltd.) equipped with an ultra high pressure mercury lamp can be used. Examples of the light source include medium to ultra high pressure mercury lamps, xenon lamps, metal halide lamps, and the like.
[0163] 照度としては、好ましくは 300mWZcm2以上であり、特に好ましくは 2, OOOmW/ cm2以上である。本発明の効果を得る観点では、照度の上限値は特になぐ装置、設 備上支障がなければ所望の照度に上げることができる。この照度は、光源の出力を 高める、光源の数を増やす、また、光源と被露光体との距離を狭くする等の方法によ り前記範囲に調整することができる。 The [0163] intensity, preferably at 300MWZcm 2 or more, particularly preferably 2, OOOmW / cm 2 or more. From the viewpoint of obtaining the effect of the present invention, the upper limit value of illuminance can be increased to a desired illuminance unless there is a particular problem in apparatus and equipment. This illuminance can be adjusted to the above range by methods such as increasing the output of the light source, increasing the number of light sources, and reducing the distance between the light source and the object to be exposed.
[0164] 露光後は、現像液を用いて現像処理を行な!ヽ、感光性榭脂層にパターン像を形成 する。その後は、必要に応じて、水洗処理が行なわれる。  [0164] After the exposure, a developing process is performed using a developer to form a pattern image on the photosensitive resin layer. Thereafter, a water washing process is performed as necessary.
[0165] 現像前には、感光性榭脂層上に純水をシャワーノズル等にて噴霧し、感光性榭脂 層の表面を均一に湿らせておくことが好ましい。現像処理に用いる現像液には、アル カリ性物質の希薄水溶液が好適に用いられるが、更に水と混和性の有機溶剤を少量 添カロしたものでもよ ヽ。  [0165] Prior to development, it is preferable that pure water is sprayed onto the photosensitive resin layer with a shower nozzle or the like to uniformly wet the surface of the photosensitive resin layer. A dilute aqueous solution of an alkaline substance is preferably used as the developer used in the development processing, but it may be a solution obtained by adding a small amount of an organic solvent miscible with water.
[0166] 前記アルカリ性物質としては、アルカリ金属水酸ィ匕物類 (例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、 水酸ィ匕カリウム)、アルカリ金属炭酸塩類 (例えば、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸カリウム)、ァ ルカリ金属重炭酸塩類 (例えば、炭酸水素ナトリウム、炭酸水素カリウム)、アルカリ金 属ケィ酸塩類 (例えば、ケィ酸ナトリウム、ケィ酸カリウム)、アルカリ金属メタケイ酸塩 類 (例えば、メタケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸カリウム)、トリエタノールァミン、ジェタノ ールァミン、モノエタノールァミン、モルホリン、テトラアルキルアンモン-ゥムヒドロキ シド類 (例えば、テトラメチルアンモ-ゥムヒドロキシド)、燐酸三ナトリウム、等が挙げら れる。アルカリ性物質の濃度は 0. 01〜30質量%が好ましぐ pHは 8〜14が好まし い。 [0166] Examples of the alkaline substance include alkali metal hydroxides (for example, sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide), alkali metal carbonates (for example, sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate), Lucari metal bicarbonates (eg, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate), alkali metal silicates (eg, sodium silicate, potassium silicate), alkali metal metasilicates (eg, sodium metasilicate, metasilicate) Potassium), triethanolamine, jetanolamine, monoethanolamine, morpholine, tetraalkylammonium hydroxides (eg, tetramethylammonium hydroxide), trisodium phosphate, and the like. The concentration of alkaline substances is preferably 0.01 to 30% by mass. The pH is preferably 8 to 14.
[0167] 前記「水と混和性の有機溶剤」としては、例えば、メタノール、エタノール、 2 プロ ノ ノ一ノレ、 1 プロパノーノレ、ブタノーノレ、ジアセトンァノレコーノレ、エチレングリコーノレ モノメチノレエーテノレ、エチレングリコーノレモノェチノレエーテノレ、エチレングリコーノレモ ノ n ブチルエーテル、ベンジルアルコール、アセトン、メチルェチルケトン、シクロへ キサノン、 ε —力プロラタトン、 γ ブチロラタトン、ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルァ セトアミド、へキサメチルホスホルアミド、乳酸ェチル、乳酸メチル、 ε 一力プロラタタム 、 Ν—メチルピロリドン等が好適に挙げられる。水と混和性の有機溶剤の濃度は、 0. 1〜30質量%が好ましい。  [0167] Examples of the "water-miscible organic solvent" include, for example, methanol, ethanol, 2-prononole, 1-propanol, butanol, diacetone-ethanolo, ethyleneglycol-no monomethinoatenore, Ethylene glycol-monoethylenoleatenole, ethylene glycol-monomonone n butyl ether, benzyl alcohol, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, ε — force prolataton, γ-butyrolataton, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, hexamethylphospho Preferable examples include luamide, ethyl acetate, methyl lactate, ε-strength prolatatam, and メ チ ル -methylpyrrolidone. The concentration of the organic solvent miscible with water is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass.
さらに、公知の界面活性剤を添加してもよぐ界面活性剤の濃度は 0. 01〜10質量 %が好ましい。  Furthermore, the concentration of the surfactant to which a known surfactant may be added is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass.
[0168] 前記現像液は、浴液としても、あるいは噴霧液としても用いることができる。  [0168] The developer may be used as a bath solution or a spray solution.
感光性榭脂層の未硬化部を除去する場合、現像液中で回転ブラシや湿潤スポン ジで擦るなどの方法を組合わせることができる。現像液の温度は通常、室温付近から 40°Cが好ましい。現像時間は、感光性榭脂層の組成、現像液のアルカリ性や温度、 有機溶剤を添加する場合にはその種類と濃度などによるが、通常 10秒〜 2分程度で ある。この範囲内では、形状の好適な濃色離画壁が得られる。換言すれば、現像時 間が短すぎると現像除去しょうとする領域の現像が不充分となると同時に紫外線の吸 光度も不充分となることがあり、逆に長すぎると、硬化部までエッチングされることがあ る。現像処理の後に、水洗工程を入れることも可能である。  When removing the uncured portion of the photosensitive resin layer, methods such as rubbing with a rotating brush or a wet sponge in the developer can be combined. The temperature of the developer is usually preferably from about room temperature to 40 ° C. The development time is usually about 10 seconds to 2 minutes, depending on the composition of the photosensitive resin layer, the alkalinity and temperature of the developer, and the type and concentration when an organic solvent is added. Within this range, a dark color separation wall having a suitable shape can be obtained. In other words, if the development time is too short, the development of the area to be developed and removed may be insufficient, and at the same time, the UV absorbance may be insufficient. Sometimes. It is also possible to put a water washing step after the development processing.
[0169] 本発明における濃色離画壁の高さとしては、基板法線方向における高さで 1. 0〜6 . が好ましく、 1. 5〜5. がより好ましい。高さが前記範囲内であると、既 述のようにインクジェット法で着色領域を打滴形成する際に、インクが濃色離画壁を 乗り越えにくぐインクの滲みやはみ出し、隣接する画素パターン間での混色及び画 素パターン中の白抜けなどを防いで、色相が良好で表示品位の高いカラーフィルタ を形成するのに有効である。 [0169] The height of the dark color separation wall in the present invention is preferably 1.0 to 6. and more preferably 1.5 to 5 in terms of the height in the substrate normal direction. If the height is within the above range, As described above, when ink droplets are formed by the ink jet method, ink spreads and protrudes beyond the dark color separation wall, color mixing between adjacent pixel patterns, and white spots in the pixel pattern. This is effective for forming a color filter with good hue and high display quality.
[0170] 本発明における濃色離画壁の幅としては、基板の法線方向と直交する方向におけ る幅で 5. 0 μ m以上 50 μ m以下であることが好ましい。そして、濃色離画壁の端部( 例えば端面)から基板面と平行方向に m以内における着色領域 (R画素、 G画 素、 B画素など)の、基板法線方向における厚みの変動幅は、 0. 5 m以下であるこ とが好ましい。該変動幅が前記範囲内であると、例えば液晶表示装置等の表示装置 に組み込んで画像表示した際の画像中に色ムラなどの表示ムラが発生するのを効果 的に防止できる。この変動幅は、好ましくは 0. 以下であり、着色画素を形成す るインクに界面活性剤を含有させることによって調整することが可能である。  [0170] The width of the dark color separation wall in the present invention is preferably 5.0 μm or more and 50 μm or less in the direction perpendicular to the normal direction of the substrate. And the variation width of the thickness in the substrate normal direction of the colored region (R pixel, G pixel, B pixel, etc.) within m in the direction parallel to the substrate surface from the edge of the dark color separation wall (for example, the end surface) is 0.5 m or less is preferable. When the fluctuation range is within the above range, it is possible to effectively prevent display unevenness such as color unevenness in an image when the image is displayed in a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. This fluctuation range is preferably not more than 0. It can be adjusted by adding a surfactant to the ink forming the colored pixels.
[0171] 以下、濃色離画壁を形成する例を具体的に説明する。  [0171] Hereinafter, an example of forming a dark color separation image wall will be specifically described.
1)濃色組成物を用いた塗布による濃色離画壁の形成  1) Formation of dark color separation wall by coating with dark color composition
基板を洗浄後、該基板を熱処理して表面状態を安定化させる。その後、基板を調 温し、調温された基板上に濃色組成物を塗布する。塗布後、塗布層中の溶媒の一部 を乾燥させて層の流動性をなくした後、 EBR (エッジ'ビード 'リムーバー)等にて基板 周囲の不要な塗布液を除去し、プリベータして感光性榭脂層を得る。塗布は、公知 のスリット状ノズルを備えたガラス基板用コーター(例えばエフ 'エー 'エス'アジア社 製の MH— 1600)等を用いて行なえる。また、乾燥は、公知の乾燥装置 (例えば、 V CD (真空乾燥装置;東京応化工業社製)等)により行なえ、プリベータは、例えば 12 0°Cで 3分間加熱して行なうことができる。感光性榭脂層の層厚については、既述の 通りである。  After cleaning the substrate, the substrate is heat treated to stabilize the surface state. Thereafter, the temperature of the substrate is adjusted, and the dark color composition is applied onto the temperature-controlled substrate. After coating, part of the solvent in the coating layer is dried to eliminate the fluidity of the layer, and then the unnecessary coating solution around the substrate is removed with an EBR (edge 'bead' remover) etc. A characteristic rosin layer is obtained. The coating can be performed using a known glass substrate coater (for example, MH-1600 manufactured by FS Asia Co., Ltd.) provided with a slit-like nozzle. The drying can be performed by a known drying apparatus (for example, V CD (vacuum drying apparatus; manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd.)), and the prebeta can be performed by heating at 120 ° C. for 3 minutes, for example. The layer thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is as described above.
続いて、感光性榭脂層が形成された基板とパターンを有するマスク (例えば石英露 光マスク)とを垂直に立てた状態で、マスク面と感光性榭脂層との間の距離を適宜( 例えば 200 m)設定し、窒素パージして酸素分圧を制御して窒素雰囲気下で露光 する。露光は、例えば超高圧水銀灯を備えたプロキシミティー型露光機 (例えば日立 ノ、ィテク電子エンジニアリング (株)製)等で行なえる。露光量は適宜 (例えば 300mJ Zcm2)選択することができる。このときの酸素分圧は、酸素計 (例えば飯島電子工業 (株)製の G— 102型)を用いて測定できる。露光後、現像液で現像処理を行なって パターン像を得、必要に応じて水洗処理して濃色離画壁を得る。 Subsequently, with the substrate on which the photosensitive resin layer is formed and a mask having a pattern (for example, a quartz exposure mask) standing vertically, the distance between the mask surface and the photosensitive resin layer is appropriately set ( For example, set to 200 m) and perform exposure in a nitrogen atmosphere by purging with nitrogen and controlling the oxygen partial pressure. The exposure can be performed by, for example, a proximity type exposure machine (for example, manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd., Techtech Engineering Co., Ltd.) equipped with an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp. Exposure amount is appropriate (for example, 300mJ Zcm 2 ) Can be selected. The oxygen partial pressure at this time can be measured using an oximeter (for example, G-102 manufactured by Iijima Electronics Co., Ltd.). After the exposure, development processing is performed with a developer to obtain a pattern image, and washing with water is performed as necessary to obtain a dark color separation image wall.
[0172] 2)感光性転写材料を用いた転写法による濃色離画壁の形成  [0172] 2) Formation of dark color separation wall by transfer method using photosensitive transfer material
まず、感光性転写材料の保護フィルムを剥離除去し、露出した感光性榭脂層の表 面を基板面に重ね合わせてラミネータ等を通過させ、加熱及び Z又は加圧して積層 体とする。ラミネータには、従来公知のラミネーター、真空ラミネーター等の中から適 宜選択することができ、より生産性を高める観点からはオートカットラミネーターも使用 可能である。次いで、積層体力 仮支持体を剥離して除去する。続いて、仮支持体を 除去して露出した露出面 (酸素遮断層表面)の上方に所望のフォトマスク (例えば石 英露光マスク)を配置し、減圧により貧酸素条件にしてマスクを介してパターン状に紫 外線を照射し、照射後所定の処理液を用いて現像処理して濃色離画壁を得る。この とき、必要に応じて水洗処理が施される。現像処理に用いる現像液及び露光に用い る光源は、前記塗布法による場合の現像液及び光源と同様である。  First, the protective film of the photosensitive transfer material is peeled and removed, and the exposed surface of the photosensitive resin layer is overlaid on the substrate surface, passed through a laminator or the like, and heated and Z or pressurized to form a laminate. The laminator can be appropriately selected from conventionally known laminators, vacuum laminators, and the like, and an auto-cut laminator can also be used from the viewpoint of increasing productivity. Next, the laminate strength temporary support is peeled off and removed. Subsequently, a desired photomask (for example, Sekihide exposure mask) is placed above the exposed surface (oxygen barrier layer surface) exposed by removing the temporary support, and the pattern is made through the mask under reduced oxygen conditions under reduced pressure. Irradiate ultraviolet rays in the shape, and after the irradiation, develop with a predetermined processing solution to obtain a dark color separation wall. At this time, washing with water is performed as necessary. The developer used for the development process and the light source used for the exposure are the same as the developer and the light source used in the coating method.
[0173] [他の工程]  [0173] [Other processes]
本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法には、形成された濃色離画壁及び着色領域を 更に加熱 (ベータ)して硬化させるベータ工程(下記の熱処理やポスト露光)や、既述 した濃色離画壁の形成後であって着色領域形成工程前に基板上の濃色離画壁に 撥インク処理を施す工程、オーバーコート(OC)層を形成する OC工程、等の他のェ 程を設けてもよい。  In the method for producing the color filter of the present invention, the formed deep color separation wall and the colored region are further heated (beta) to be cured (the following heat treatment and post-exposure) or the above-described dark color separation. Other processes such as the process of applying ink repellent treatment to the dark color separation wall on the substrate after the image wall is formed and before the colored area forming process, and the OC process for forming the overcoat (OC) layer are provided. May be.
[0174] 〜熱処理〜 [0174] ~ Heat treatment ~
熱処理 (ポストベータとも言う。)を施すことにより、濃色組成物又は感光性榭脂層に 含まれるモノマーや架橋剤などを反応させて、濃色離画壁の硬度を確保することが できる。  By applying heat treatment (also referred to as post-beta), it is possible to react the monomer or the crosslinking agent contained in the dark color composition or the photosensitive resin layer to ensure the hardness of the dark color separation wall.
熱処理の温度は、 150〜250°Cの範囲が好ましい。温度が前記範囲内であると、 良好な硬度が得られ、榭脂の着色がなく色純度が良好である。また、熱処理の時間 は、 10〜150分が好ましい。時間が前記範囲内であると、良好な硬度が得られ、榭 脂の着色がなく色純度が良好である。熱処理は、色によって変えてもよい。また、前 述のインクジェット法により全部の色を形成後、更に最終の熱処理を行なって硬度を 安定ィ匕させてもよい。その場合、高めの温度 (例えば 240°C)で実施することが硬度 の点で好ましい。 The heat treatment temperature is preferably in the range of 150 to 250 ° C. When the temperature is within the above range, good hardness is obtained, and the color purity is good without coloring the resin. The heat treatment time is preferably 10 to 150 minutes. When the time is within the above range, good hardness can be obtained, the resin is not colored, and the color purity is good. The heat treatment may be changed depending on the color. Also before After all colors are formed by the ink jet method described above, the final heat treatment may be further performed to stabilize the hardness. In that case, it is preferable in terms of hardness to carry out at a higher temperature (for example, 240 ° C).
[0175] 〜ポスト露光〜  [0175] ~ Post exposure ~
現像と熱処理との間には、ポスト露光 (再露光ともいう)を実施することができる。 ポスト露光を実施すると、濃色離画壁の断面形状のコントロール、濃色離画壁の硬 度のコントロール、濃色離画壁の表面凹凸のコントロール、濃色離画壁の膜減りのコ ントロールなどの観点で好ましい。ポスト露光に用いる光源としては、特開 2005— 38 61号公報の段落番号 [0074]に記載の超高圧水銀ランプ、高圧水銀ランプ、メタル ハライドランプ等が挙げられる。ポスト露光は、超高圧水銀灯やメタルハライド等の光 源力もの光を露光マスクなどを介さず直接基板に照射することが、設備の簡素化と省 電力の観点で好ましい。必要に応じて、基板の両面から実施する。この場合、露光量 は、上面側に 100〜2000mjZcm2、下面側に 100〜2000mj/cm2の範囲で、前 記コントロール目的に応じて適宜調整することができる。 Post-exposure (also referred to as re-exposure) can be performed between development and heat treatment. When post exposure is performed, control of the cross-sectional shape of the dark color separation wall, control of the hardness of the dark color separation wall, control of surface unevenness of the dark color separation wall, and control of film reduction of the dark color separation wall It is preferable from the viewpoints. Examples of the light source used for the post-exposure include an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, and a metal halide lamp described in paragraph No. [0074] of JP-A-2005-3861. In the post-exposure, it is preferable from the viewpoint of simplification of equipment and power saving that the substrate is directly irradiated with light having a light source such as an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp or a metal halide without using an exposure mask. If necessary, carry out from both sides of the substrate. In this case, the exposure dose can be appropriately adjusted in the range of 100 to 2000 mjZcm 2 on the upper surface side and 100 to 2000 mj / cm 2 on the lower surface side according to the control purpose.
[0176] 撥インク処理については、例えば、(1)撥インク性物質を濃色離画壁に練りこむ方 法 (例えば、特開 2005— 36160号公報参照)、(2)撥インク層を新たに設ける方法( 例えば、特開平 5— 241011号公報参照)、(3)プラズマ処理により撥インク性を付与 する方法 (例えば、特開 2002— 62420号公報参照)、(4)濃色離画壁の壁上面に 撥インク材料を塗布する方法 (例えば、特開平 10— 123500号公報参照)、などが挙 げられ、特に(3)基板上に形成された濃色離画壁にプラズマによる撥インク化処理を 施す方法が好ましい。  [0176] Regarding the ink repellent treatment, for example, (1) a method of kneading an ink repellent substance on a dark color separation wall (for example, see JP-A-2005-36160), (2) a new ink repellent layer (3) A method for imparting ink repellency by plasma treatment (for example, see JP-A-2002-62420), (4) Dark color separation wall A method of applying an ink repellent material to the upper surface of the wall (see, for example, JP-A-10-123500), and in particular, (3) ink repellent by plasma on a dark color separation wall formed on a substrate. A method of applying a crystallization treatment is preferable.
[0177] 上記のように着色領域 (着色画素)及び濃色離画壁を形成してカラーフィルタを作 製した後には、耐性向上の目的で、着色領域及び濃色濃色離画壁の全面を覆うよう にしてオーバーコート層を形成することができる。  [0177] After the colored region (colored pixel) and the dark color separation wall are formed as described above and the color filter is formed, the entire surface of the colored region and the dark color separation wall is formed for the purpose of improving the durability. An overcoat layer can be formed so as to cover.
[0178] オーバーコート層は、 R, G, B等の着色領域及び濃色濃色離画壁を保護すると共 に表面を平坦にすることができる。但し、工程数が増える点からは設けないことが好ま しい。 [0178] The overcoat layer can protect the colored areas such as R, G, and B and the dark-colored / high-color separation wall, and can also flatten the surface. However, it is preferable not to set up because the number of processes increases.
オーバーコート層は樹脂 (oc剤)を用いて構成することができる。榭脂 (OC剤)とし ては、アクリル系榭脂組成物、エポキシ榭脂組成物、ポリイミド榭脂組成物などが挙 げられる。中でも、可視光領域での透明性で優れており、カラーフィルタ用光硬化性 組成物の榭脂成分が通常アクリル系榭脂を主成分としており、密着性に優れることか ら、アクリル系榭脂組成物が望ましい。オーバーコート層の例として、特開 2003— 28 7618号公報の段落番号 [0018]〜[0028]に記載のものや、オーバーコート剤の巿 販品として、 JSR社製のォプトマ一 SS6699Gが挙げられる。 The overcoat layer can be formed using a resin (oc agent). As rosin (OC agent) Examples thereof include an acrylic resin composition, an epoxy resin composition, and a polyimide resin composition. Above all, it is excellent in transparency in the visible light region, and the resin component of the photocurable composition for color filters usually has an acrylic resin as the main component, and since it has excellent adhesion, the acrylic resin A composition is desirable. Examples of the overcoat layer include those described in paragraphs [0018] to [0028] of JP-A-2003-28 7618, and as an overcoat agent commercial product, Optomer 1 SS6699G manufactured by JSR Corporation may be mentioned. .
[0179] 本発明のカラーフィルタは、既述の本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法により作製 されたものであり、例えば、テレビ、パーソナルコンピュータ、液晶プロジェクター、ゲ ーム機、携帯電話などの携帯端末、デジタルカメラ、カーナビなどの用途に特に制限 なく好適に適用できる。 [0179] The color filter of the present invention is produced by the above-described method for producing the color filter of the present invention. For example, the color filter of the present invention is a portable terminal such as a television, a personal computer, a liquid crystal projector, a game machine, or a cellular phone. It can be suitably applied to applications such as digital cameras and car navigation systems without particular limitation.
実施例  Example
[0180] 以下、本発明を実施例により更に具体的に説明するが、本発明はその主旨を越え ない限り、以下の実施例に限定されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部 」及び「%」は質量基準である。  [0180] Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. However, the present invention is not limited to the following examples unless it exceeds the gist of the present invention. Unless otherwise specified, “part” and “%” are based on mass.
[0181] インク組成物の調製  [0181] Preparation of ink composition
下記表 1に示す組成中の化合物を混合し、赤色のインク組成物 R、緑色のインク組 成物 G、及び青色のインク組成物 B力もなるインク組成物を調製した。  Compounds in the composition shown in Table 1 below were mixed to prepare an ink composition having red ink composition R, green ink composition G, and blue ink composition B.
[0182] [表 1] [0182] [Table 1]
インク組成物 R インク組成物 G インク組成物 B ピゲメント 'レット' 254 100 - - ヒ。ゲメン !《■ゲリ—ン 36 - 100 - ピゲメン卜-ブル- 1 5 : 6 - - 100 Ink composition R Ink composition G Ink composition B Pigment 'let' 254 100-- Gemen! 《■ Gelene 36-100-Pigmen 卜-Bull-1 5: 6--100
メタクリル酸ノベンジルメタクリレート共重合体  Nobenzyl methacrylate copolymer
(共重合重量比 =28/72、重量平均分子量 = 3 50 50 50  (Copolymerization weight ratio = 28/72, weight average molecular weight = 3 50 50 50
0, 000)  (0, 000)
ジペンタエリスリ! ~一ルペンタァクリレート 50 50 50  Dipentaerythri! ~ One Rupentaacrylate 50 50 50
2, 2'—ビス(2—クロ口フエニル)一 4, 4', 5, 5'  2, 2'—Bis (2-phenyl) 1, 4, 4 ', 5, 5'
—テトラキス(4一エトキシカルポニルフエニル)一 10 10 10  —Tetrakis (4 ethoxycarbonyl phenyl) 1 10 10 10
1 , 2 '—ビイミダゾール  1, 2'-biimidazole
4, 4'一ビス(ジェチルァミノ)ベンゾフエノン 10 10 10  4, 4 'Onebis (Jetylamino) benzophenone 10 10 10
テトラエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル 1700 1700 1700 合計 1920 1920 1920  Tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether 1700 1700 1700 Total 1920 1920 1920
単位: 部  Unit: part
[0183] 続いて、得られたインク組成物 R, G, Bそれぞれ 100部に、下記表 2に示すフッ素 系界面活性剤 0. 1部を添カ卩しあるいは添加せずに、インク No.l〜16、インク No.lO 0〜101を調製した(添力卩量は 0. 1質量0 /0である)。なお、インク No.l〜16、インク N ο.100〜101は、それぞれ R, G, B3色のインクが含まれる。 [0183] Subsequently, 100 parts of each of the obtained ink compositions R, G, and B was added with or without 0.1 part of a fluorosurfactant shown in Table 2 below. L~16, ink No.LO 0-101 was prepared (添力卩量is 0.1 mass 0/0). Note that ink Nos. 1 to 16 and inks N o.100 to 101 include inks of R, G, and B colors, respectively.
[0184] [表 2] [0184] [Table 2]
フッ素系界面活性剤 Fluorosurfactant
モノマ一 a モノマ一 b1 b2 共重合比貧置平均 備考 Monomer a Monomer b 1 b 2 Copolymerization ratio Poor average Remarks
=a: b' : b2 分子量 = a: b ': b 2 molecular weight
R1 m n R2 R3 R4 P q Rz R3 R4 P q R 1 mn R 2 R 3 R 4 P q R z R 3 R 4 P q
インク o  Ink o
No. 1 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 30000 実施例 1No. 1 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000 Example 1
No. 2 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:40:20 30000 実施例 2No. 2 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40:40:20 30000 Example 2
No. 3 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 ― 40:60:0 30000 実施例 3No. 3 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 ― 40: 60: 0 30000 Example 3
No. 4 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 25:60:15 30000 実施例 4No. 4 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 25:60:15 30000 Example 4
No. 5 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 60:25:15 30000 実施例 5No. 5 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 60:25:15 30000 Example 5
No. 6 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 5000 実施例 6No. 6 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 5000 Example 6
No. 7 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 30000 実施例 7No. 7 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000 Example 7
No. 8 H 6 2 H CH3 H 6 1 - 40:60:0 3D000 実施例 8No. 8 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 6 1-40: 60: 0 3D000 Example 8
No. 9 H 6 2 H CH3 H 1 6 ― 40:60:0 30000 実施例 9No. 9 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 1 6 ― 40: 60: 0 30000 Example 9
No. 10 CH3 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 30000 実施例 10No. 10 CH 3 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000 Example 10
No. 11 H 6 2 H CH3 CH3 7 0 H H CH3 0 7 40:55:5 30000 実施例 11No. 11 H 6 2 H CH 3 CH 3 7 0 HH CH 3 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000 Example 11
No. 12 H 6 2 CH3 CH3 H 7 0 CH3 H H 0 7 40:55:5 30000 実施例 12 No. 12 H 6 2 CH 3 CH 3 H 7 0 CH 3 HH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000 Example 12
H 12 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 30000 実施例 13H 12 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000 Example 13
No. 14 H 4 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 30000 実施例 14 No. 14 H 4 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000 Example 14
No. 15 H 6 2 H CH3 H 14 0 H H H 0 7 40:55:5 30000 実施例 15No. 15 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 14 0 HHH 0 7 40: 55: 5 30000 Example 15
No, 16 H 6 2 H CH3 H 7 0 H H H 0 14 40:55:5 30000 実施例 16 添加せず 比較例 1No, 16 H 6 2 H CH 3 H 7 0 HHH 0 14 40: 55: 5 30000 Example 16 No addition Comparative Example 1
No. 101 H 6 2 I H J H H 7 0 I H I H I H 0 7 115:60:25 30000 比較例 2 No. 101 H 6 2 I H J H H 7 0 I H I H I H 0 7 115: 60: 25 30000 Comparative Example 2
[0185] 濃色組成物 K1の調製 [0185] Preparation of dark color composition K1
まず、下記表 3に記載の量の K顔料分散物 1、及びプロピレングリコールモノメチル エーテルアセテート(ダイセル化学工業 (株)製、 MMPGAC)をは力り取り、温度 24 °C (±2°C)で混合して 150r.p.m.で 10分間攪拌し、次いで、メチルェチルケトン、バ インダー 1、ハイドロキノンモノメチルエーテル、 DPHA液、 2, 4 ビス(トリクロロメチ ノレ)— 6— [4'— (N, N ジエトキシカルボニルメチルァミノ)—3'—ブロモフエニル] —s トリァジン、及び界面活性剤 1をはかり取り、温度 25°C (± 2°C)でこの順に添加 し、温度 40°C (±2°C)にて 150r.p.m.で 30分間攪拌することにより、濃色組成物 K1 を調製した。  First, K pigment dispersion 1 and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd., MMPGAC) in the amounts shown in Table 3 below are removed and heated at a temperature of 24 ° C (± 2 ° C). Mix and stir at 150 rpm for 10 minutes, then methyl ethyl ketone, binder 1, hydroquinone monomethyl ether, DPHA solution, 2, 4 bis (trichloromethylolene) — 6— [4'— (N, N Diethoxycarbonylmethylamino) —3′-bromophenyl] —s Triazine and Surfactant 1 are weighed out and added in this order at a temperature of 25 ° C (± 2 ° C) and a temperature of 40 ° C (± 2 ° In C), a dark color composition K1 was prepared by stirring at 150 rpm for 30 minutes.
[0186] [表 3] 濂色組成物 K1 K2[0186] [Table 3] Amber composition K1 K2
K顔料分散物 1 (力-ホ'ンフ'ラック) 25 30 プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート 8.0 7.3 メチルェチルケトン 53 34 シクロへキサノン 0 8.6 バインダー 1 9.1 14K Pigment Dispersion 1 (Strong-Honflac) 25 30 Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 8.0 7.3 Methyl ethyl ketone 53 34 Cyclohexanone 0 8.6 Binder 1 9.1 14
DPHA液 4.2 5.8DPHA solution 4.2 5.8
2, 4 -ビス(トリクロロメチル)一 6— [4'一(N, N—ジェ 2, 4-bis (trichloromethyl) mono 6- [4 'mono (N, N-je
トキシカルボニルメチル)ァミノ一 3'—ブロモフエニル]一 0.22 0.22 s—卜リアジン  Toxicarbonylmethyl) amino-1 3'-bromophenyl] 1 0.22 0.22 s- 卜 lyazine
ハイドロキノンモノメチルエーテル 0.002 0 フエノチアジン 0 0.006 界面活性剤 1 0.044 0.058  Hydroquinone monomethyl ether 0.002 0 Phenothiazine 0 0.006 Surfactant 1 0.044 0.058
(質量部)  (Mass)
[0187] 前記表 3中の各成分の詳細を以下に示す。 [0187] Details of each component in Table 3 are shown below.
* K顔料分散物 1  * K pigment dispersion 1
'カーボンブラック(Nipex35、デグッサ社製)… 13. 1%  'Carbon black (Nipex35, Degussa)… 13. 1%
'下記分散剤:!… 0. 65%  'The following dispersant: … 0. 65%
'ポリマー(ベンジルメタタリレート Zメタクリル酸 = 72 28モル比のランダム共重合 物、分子量 3. 7万)… 6. 72%  'Polymer (benzyl metatalate Z methacrylic acid = 72 28 molar ratio random copolymer, molecular weight 37,000)… 6. 72%
'プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート… 79. 53%  'Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate… 79. 53%
[0188] [化 4] [0188] [Chemical 4]
Figure imgf000051_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
[0189] *バインダー 1 [0189] * Binder 1
'ポリマー(ベンジルメタタリレート Zメタクリル酸( = 78Z22 [モル比])のランダム共重 合物、分子量 3. 8万)… 27%  'Random copolymer of polymer (benzyl metatalylate Z methacrylic acid (= 78Z22 [molar ratio]), molecular weight 38,000)… 27%
'プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート… 73%  'Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate… 73%
[0190] 水 DPHA液 [0190] Water DPHA solution
'ジペンタエリスリトールへキサアタリレート… 76%  'Dipentaerythritol Hexaatalylate… 76%
(KAYARAD DPHA、重合禁止剤 MEHQ500ppm含有、日本化薬 (株)製) (KAYARAD DPHA, polymerization inhibitor MEHQ 500ppm contained, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)
'プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート… 24% 'Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate ... 24%
[0191] *界面活性剤 1 [0191] * Surfactant 1
•下記構造物 1· -30%  • The following structures 1-30%
•メチルェチルケトン… 70%  • Methyl ethyl ketone… 70%
[0192] [化 5] 構造物 1
Figure imgf000052_0001
[0192] [Chemical 5] Structure 1
Figure imgf000052_0001
(n = 6、 x-55、 y = 5 » (n = 6, x-55, y = 5 »
w=33940, w/Mn = 2. 55  w = 33940, w / Mn = 2.55
PO:プロピレンオキサイド、 EO:エチレンオキサイド)  (PO: propylene oxide, EO: ethylene oxide)
[0193] 濃色感光性転写材料 K1の作製 [0193] Production of dark photosensitive transfer material K1
厚さ 75 μ mのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム仮支持体(PET仮支持体)の上に 、スリット状ノズルを用いて、下記処方 HIからなる熱可塑性榭脂層用塗布液を塗布、 乾燥させて熱可塑性榭脂層を形成した。次に、この熱可塑性榭脂層上に更に、下記 処方 P1からなる中間層用塗布液を塗布し、乾燥させて中間層を積層した。続いて、 中間層上に上記より得た濃色組成物 K1を塗布し、乾燥させて黒色の濃色感光層を 更に積層した。  Using a slit-like nozzle on a 75 μm thick polyethylene terephthalate film temporary support (PET temporary support), apply a thermoplastic resin coating solution consisting of the following formulation HI, and dry it to make the thermoplastic A resin layer was formed. Next, an intermediate layer coating solution having the following formulation P1 was further applied onto this thermoplastic resin layer and dried to laminate the intermediate layer. Subsequently, the dark color composition K1 obtained above was applied onto the intermediate layer and dried to further laminate a black dark color photosensitive layer.
[0194] 以上のようにして、 PET仮支持体上に乾燥膜厚 14.6 μ mの熱可塑性榭脂層と、 乾燥膜厚 1. の中間層と、乾燥膜厚 mの濃色感光層とを設け、濃色感光層 の表面に保護フィルム(厚さ 12 mのポリプロピレンフィルム)を圧着した。このように して、仮支持体 Z熱可塑性榭脂層 Z中間層 Z濃色感光層の積層構造に構成された 濃色感光性転写材料を作製した。以下、これを濃色感光性転写材料 K1とする。  [0194] As described above, a thermoplastic resin layer having a dry film thickness of 14.6 μm, an intermediate layer having a dry film thickness of 1, and a dark photosensitive layer having a dry film thickness of m are formed on the PET temporary support. A protective film (polypropylene film with a thickness of 12 m) was pressure-bonded to the surface of the dark photosensitive layer. In this manner, a dark color photosensitive transfer material having a laminated structure of a temporary support Z, a thermoplastic resin layer, a Z intermediate layer, and a Z dark color photosensitive layer was produced. Hereinafter, this is referred to as dark color photosensitive transfer material K1.
[0195] 〈熱可塑性榭脂層用塗布液の処方 Hl〉  [0195] <Prescription of coating solution for thermoplastic resin layer Hl>
•メタノール '·.η.1部 • Methanol '·. Η .1 part
'プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート… 6.36部  'Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate ... 6.36 parts
•メチルェチルケトン ".52.4部  • Methyl ethyl ketone ".52.4 parts
'メチルメタタリレート /2—ェチルへキシルアタリレート/ベンジルメタタリレート/メ タクリル酸共重合体 … 5.83部  'Methyl methacrylate // 2-ethylhexyl acrylate / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer… 5.83 parts
(共重合比 [モル比] = 55Zll.7/4.5/28.8、分子量 = 10万、 Tg 70°C) •スチレン Zアクリル酸共重合体 ·'·13.6部 (共重合比 [モル比] = 63Z37、平均分子量 = 1万、 Tg= 100°C) (Copolymerization ratio [molar ratio] = 55Zll.7 / 4.5 / 28.8, molecular weight = 100,000, Tg 70 ° C) • Styrene Z acrylic acid copolymer ··· 13.6 parts (Copolymerization ratio [molar ratio] = 63Z37, average molecular weight = 10,000, Tg = 100 ° C)
•2, 2 ビス [4— (メタクリロキシポリエトキシ)フエ-ル]プロパン (新中村ィ匕学工業( 株)製) … 9. 1部  • 2, 2 Bis [4— (Methacryloxypolyethoxy) phenol] propane (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Engineering Co., Ltd.)… 9. 1 part
•メガファック F780F (大日本インキ化学工業製)… 0. 54部  • Mega Fuck F780F (Dainippon Ink Chemical Co., Ltd.) ... 0. 54 parts
し鶴  Shizuru
•C F CH CH OCOCH = CH (40部)と H (OCH (CH ) CH ) OCOCH = C • C F CH CH OCOCH = CH (40 parts) and H (OCH (CH) CH) OCOCH = C
6 13 2 2 2 3 2 7 6 13 2 2 2 3 2 7
H (55部)と H (OCH CH ) OCOCH = CH (5部)との共重合体(質量平均分子量 Copolymer of H (55 parts) and H (OCH CH) OCOCH = CH (5 parts) (mass average molecular weight
2 2 2 7 2 2 2 2 7 2
30, 000) · ·· 30部  30, 000)
•メチルェチルケトン… 70部  • Methyl ethyl ketone… 70 parts
[0196] く中間層用塗布液の処方 Pl〉 [0196] Prescription of coating solution for intermediate layer Pl>
•PVA- 205 … 32. 2部  • PVA- 205… 32. 2 copies
〔(株)クラレ製、酸ィ匕度 = 88%、重合度 550 ;ポリビュルアルコール〕  [Manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd., acidity = 88%, polymerization degree 550; polybulu alcohol]
'ポリビュルピロリドン … 14. 9部  'Polybylpyrrolidone… 14. 9 parts
(アイエスピ一.ジャパン社製、 K- 30)  (ISPI, Japan, K-30)
'蒸留水 一524部  'Distilled water 524 parts
•メタノーノレ · '·429咅  • Methanore · '· 429 咅
[0197] 濃色離画壁の形成 (転写法) [0197] Formation of dark color separation wall (transfer method)
無アルカリガラス基板 (以下、単に「ガラス基板」という。)を、 25°Cに調整したガラス 洗浄剤液をシャワーにより 20秒間吹き付けながらナイロン毛を有する回転ブラシで洗 浄した。さらに純水シャワー洗浄後、シランカップリング液 (N— β (アミノエチル) Ύ - ァミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン 0. 3%水溶液;商品名: KBM603、信越化学工業( 株)製)をシャワーにより 20秒間吹き付け、純水シャワー洗浄した。その後、この基板 を基板予備加熱装置を用いて 100°Cで 2分間加熱した。 An alkali-free glass substrate (hereinafter, simply referred to as “glass substrate”) was cleaned with a rotating brush having nylon hair while spraying a glass cleaning solution adjusted to 25 ° C. for 20 seconds by a shower. Further, after washing with pure water shower, a silane coupling solution (N-β (aminoethyl) Ύ- aminopropyltrimethoxysilane 0.3 % aqueous solution; trade name: KBM603, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) is showered. Sprayed for 2 seconds and washed with pure water shower. Thereafter, this substrate was heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a substrate preheating apparatus.
[0198] シランカップリング処理後のガラス基板に、上記より得た濃色感光性転写材料 K1か ら保護フィルムを剥離除去した。除去により露出した濃色感光層の表面と前記ガラス 基板の表面とが接するように重ね合わせた後、ラミネータ LamicII型〔(株)日立インダ ストリイズ製〕を用いて、ゴムローラー温度 130°C、線圧 100NZcm、搬送速度 2. 2m Z分の条件にてラミネートした。 続いて、 PET仮支持体を、 PET仮支持体と熱可塑性榭脂層との界面で剥離し、仮 支持体を除去して転写した。仮支持体を剥離後、超高圧水銀灯を備えたプロキシミ ティー型露光機 (日立ハイテク電子エンジニアリング (株)製)を用いて、基板とマスク( 画像パターンを有する石英露光マスク)とを垂直に立て、マスク面と濃色感光層との 間の距離を 200 mに設定した状態で、露光量 70mi/cm2でパターン露光した。 [0198] The protective film was peeled and removed from the dark photosensitive transfer material K1 obtained above on the glass substrate after the silane coupling treatment. After superposition so that the surface of the dark photosensitive layer exposed by removal and the surface of the glass substrate are in contact with each other, a laminator Lamic II type (manufactured by Hitachi Industries Ltd.) is used, with a rubber roller temperature of 130 ° C. and a line. Lamination was performed under conditions of a pressure of 100 NZcm and a conveyance speed of 2. 2 mZ. Subsequently, the PET temporary support was peeled off at the interface between the PET temporary support and the thermoplastic resin layer, and the temporary support was removed and transferred. After peeling the temporary support, use a proximity type exposure machine (manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Electronics Engineering Co., Ltd.) equipped with an ultra high pressure mercury lamp, and vertically stand the substrate and mask (quartz exposure mask with image pattern) With the distance between the mask surface and the dark photosensitive layer set to 200 m, pattern exposure was performed at an exposure of 70 mi / cm 2 .
[0199] 次 、で、 KOH系現像液 (KOH、ノ-オン界面活性剤含有、 CDK— 1 (商品名;富 士フィルムエレクト口-クスマテリアルズ (株)製)を純水で 100倍に希釈した液)にて 2 3°Cで 80秒間、フラットノズルにて 0. 04MPaの圧力で噴射してシャワー現像を行な い、濃色感光層の未露光部とその下層の中間層及び熱可塑性榭脂層とを除去した 。このようにして、ガラス基板上に黒色パターンを得た。続いて、大気下でァライナー により、ガラス基板の全面を、ガラス基板の黒色パターンが形成されている側から 2, OOOmiZcm2にてポスト露光し、光学濃度 (D) 4. 0の濃色離画壁を形成した(以下、 濃色離画壁付基板と称する。 ) o [0199] Next, KOH-based developer (KOH, containing non-ionic surfactant, CDK-1 (trade name; manufactured by Fuji Film Elect Kokuku Materials Co., Ltd.)) 100 times with pure water In the diluted solution), spray development is performed at 23 ° C for 80 seconds and with a flat nozzle at a pressure of 0.04 MPa, and shower development is performed. The plastic rosin layer was removed. In this way, a black pattern was obtained on the glass substrate. Subsequently, the entire surface of the glass substrate was post-exposed with 2, OOOmiZcm 2 from the side of the glass substrate where the black pattern was formed using an aligner in the atmosphere, and a dark color separation with an optical density (D) of 4.0. A wall was formed (hereinafter referred to as a dark color separation wall-mounted substrate). O
[0200] (実施例 1)  [0200] (Example 1)
一着色画素部の形成  Formation of one colored pixel part
上記より得られた濃色離画壁付基板を用い、前記表 2に示すインク No.1の R, G, B各色のインクをインクジェット法により吐出速度 7mZ秒にて、濃色離画壁で取り囲 まれた凹部に吐出し、付与されたインク面の高さが濃色離画壁の高さよりも高く盛り上 がるまで吐出後、ホットプレート上に載置して 200°Cで 2分間ポストベータを行なって 溶剤を蒸発させた。このとき、インクの盛り上がりは平坦ィ匕した。さらに、 200°Cのォー ブン内で 1時間ポストベータを行なって硬化させた。このようにして、 R画素, G画素, B画素 3色の着色画素部が基板上に配置されたカラーフィルタを得た (以下、カラー フィルタ基板と称する。)。  Using the substrate with the dark color separation wall obtained as described above, the inks of R, G, and B of ink No. 1 shown in Table 2 were ejected on the dark color separation wall at an ejection speed of 7 mZ seconds by the inkjet method. After discharging to the enclosed recess and discharging until the height of the applied ink surface rises higher than the height of the dark color separation wall, place it on a hot plate for 2 minutes at 200 ° C Post-beta was performed to evaporate the solvent. At this time, the rise of the ink was flat. Furthermore, it was cured by post-beta in a 200 ° C oven for 1 hour. In this way, a color filter in which colored pixel portions of three colors of R pixel, G pixel, and B pixel were arranged on the substrate was obtained (hereinafter referred to as a color filter substrate).
[0201] 液晶表示装置の作製  [0201] Fabrication of liquid crystal display device
次に、得られたカラーフィルタ基板を構成する R画素、 G画素及び B画素並びに濃 色離画壁の上にさらに、スパッタリングにより ITO (Indium Tin Oxide)膜を設け、 透明電極を形成した。別途、対向基板としてガラス基板を用意し、カラーフィルタ基 板の透明電極上及び対向基板上にそれぞれ、 PVAモード用にエッチングレジストを 用いてパター-ングした。 Next, an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) film was further formed on the R pixel, G pixel, B pixel, and dark color separation wall constituting the obtained color filter substrate by sputtering to form a transparent electrode. Separately, prepare a glass substrate as the counter substrate, and apply an etching resist for PVA mode on the transparent electrode of the color filter substrate and on the counter substrate, respectively. And patterned.
[0202] 次に、上記のカラーフィルタ基板の透明電極 (ITO膜)上における、濃色離画壁の 上方に位置する部分にフォトスぺーサを設けると共に、その上に更にポリイミドよりな る配向膜を設けた。その後、カラーフィルタ基板の RGB3色の着色画素部の全体を 取り囲むように周囲に設けられた隔壁外枠位置にエポキシ榭脂のシール剤を印刷す ると共に PVAモード用液晶を滴下し、対向基板と貼り合わせた後、貼り合わされた両 基板を熱処理してシール剤を硬化させ、液晶セルを作製した。  [0202] Next, a photospacer is provided on the transparent electrode (ITO film) of the color filter substrate above the dark color separation wall, and an alignment film made of polyimide is further formed thereon. Was provided. After that, a sealant of epoxy resin is printed on the outer peripheral wall of the partition wall so as to surround the entire color pixel portion of the RGB color of the color filter substrate, and a PVA mode liquid crystal is dropped on the opposite substrate. After bonding, the bonded substrates were heat-treated to cure the sealing agent, and a liquid crystal cell was produced.
さらに、作製した液晶セルの両側の基板面に (株)サンリッツ製の偏光板 HLC2— 2 518を貼り付けた。次いで、冷陰極管を用いてバックライトを構成し、このノックライト を前記偏光板が設けられた液晶セルの背面となる側に配置し、液晶表示装置とした  Further, a polarizing plate HLC2-2518 manufactured by Sanritz Co., Ltd. was attached to the substrate surfaces on both sides of the produced liquid crystal cell. Next, a cold cathode tube was used to form a backlight, and this knock light was placed on the side of the liquid crystal cell on which the polarizing plate was provided to provide a liquid crystal display device.
[0203] (実施例 2〜16) [0203] (Examples 2 to 16)
実施例 1において、インク No.lを前記表 2に示すインク No.2〜16の各々に代えた こと以外、実施例 1と同様にして、カラーフィルタ基板を作製すると共に、液晶表示装 置を作製した。  In Example 1, except that the ink No. 1 was replaced with each of the ink Nos. 2 to 16 shown in Table 2 above, a color filter substrate was prepared and a liquid crystal display device was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1. Produced.
[0204] (実施例 17) [0204] (Example 17)
実施例 1において、転写法による濃色離画壁の形成を、以下に示す塗布法により 行なったこと以外、実施例 1と同様にして、カラーフィルタ基板を作製すると共に、液 晶表示装置を作製した。  In Example 1, a color filter substrate was produced and a liquid crystal display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the dark color separation wall was formed by the transfer method by the coating method shown below. did.
[0205] 濃色離画壁の形成 (塗布法) [0205] Formation of dark color separation wall (coating method)
無アルカリガラス基板 (以下、単位「ガラス基板」という。)を UV洗浄装置で洗浄後、 洗浄剤を用いてブラシ洗浄し、さらに超純水で超音波洗浄した。その後、ガラス基板 を 120°Cで 3分間熱処理して表面状態を安定化させた。  An alkali-free glass substrate (hereinafter referred to as a unit “glass substrate”) was cleaned with a UV cleaning device, then brush-cleaned with a cleaning agent, and further ultrasonically cleaned with ultrapure water. Thereafter, the glass substrate was heat treated at 120 ° C for 3 minutes to stabilize the surface state.
[0206] ガラス基板を冷却後、 23°Cに温調し、スリット状ノズルを備えたガラス基板用コータ 一 MH— 1600 (エフ 'エー'エス'アジア社製)にて、上記より得た濃色組成物 K1を 塗布した。引き続き、 VCD (真空乾燥装置、東京応化工業社製)を用いて 30秒間溶 媒の一部を乾燥させ、塗布層の流動性を無くした後、 120°Cで 3分間プリベータして[0206] After cooling the glass substrate, the temperature was adjusted to 23 ° C, and the glass substrate coater with a slit-like nozzle, MH-1600 (manufactured by F'AS Asia Co., Ltd.), was obtained from the above. Color composition K1 was applied. Subsequently, using a VCD (vacuum dryer, manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd.), part of the solvent is dried for 30 seconds to eliminate the fluidity of the coating layer, and then pre-beta for 3 minutes at 120 ° C.
、膜厚 2 mの濃色感光層 K1を形成した。 [0207] 超高圧水銀灯を備えたプロキシミティー型露光機 (日立ノ、ィテク電子エンジニアリン グ (株)製)を用い、濃色感光層 K1が形成されたガラス基板とマスク (画像パターンを 有する石英露光マスク)とを垂直に立て、マスク面と濃色感光層 K1との間の距離を 2 00 /z mに設定した状態で、窒素雰囲気下、露光量 300miZcm2でパターン露光し た。 A dark photosensitive layer K1 having a thickness of 2 m was formed. [0207] Using a proximity-type exposure machine equipped with an ultra-high-pressure mercury lamp (manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd., Techtech Engineering Co., Ltd.), a glass substrate and mask (quartz with an image pattern) on which a dark photosensitive layer K1 is formed With the exposure mask standing vertically and the distance between the mask surface and the dark photosensitive layer K1 set to 200 / zm, pattern exposure was performed at a dose of 300 miZcm 2 in a nitrogen atmosphere.
[0208] 次に、純水をシャワーノズルにて噴霧して、濃色感光層 K1の表面を均一に湿らせ た後、 KOH系現像液 (KOH、ノ-オン界面活性剤含有、 CDK— 1 (商品名;富士フ イルムエレクト口-クスマテリアルズ (株)製)を純水で 100倍に希釈したもの)にて 23 °Cで 80秒間、フラットノズルにて 0. 04MPaの圧力で噴射してシャワー現像し、黒色 パターンを得た。引き続き、超純水を超高圧洗浄ノズルにて 9. 8MPaの圧力で噴射 して残渣除去を行なった。更に、大気下で露光量 2, OOOmjZcm2にてポスト露光を 行なった。このようにして、光学濃度 3. 9の濃色離画壁を形成し、濃色離画壁付基板 を作製した。 [0208] Next, pure water is sprayed with a shower nozzle to uniformly wet the surface of the dark photosensitive layer K1, and then a KOH developer (KOH, containing a nonionic surfactant, CDK-1) (Product name: Fujifilm Elect Mouth-X Materials Co., Ltd.) diluted 100 times with pure water) and sprayed at 23 ° C for 80 seconds with a flat nozzle at a pressure of 0.04 MPa And developed with a shower to obtain a black pattern. Subsequently, ultrapure water was sprayed at a pressure of 9.8 MPa with an ultrahigh pressure washing nozzle to remove residues. Further, post-exposure was performed at an exposure dose of 2, OOOmjZcm 2 in the atmosphere. In this way, a dark color separation wall having an optical density of 3.9 was formed to produce a substrate with a dark color separation wall.
[0209] (実施例 18)  [Example 18]
実施例 1において、濃色離画壁の形成に用いた濃色組成物の処方を、濃色組成 物 K1から濃色組成物 K2に変更したこと以外、実施例 1と同様にして、カラーフィルタ 基板を作製すると共に、液晶表示装置を作製した。  A color filter was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the formulation of the dark color composition used for forming the dark color separation wall in Example 1 was changed from the dark color composition K1 to the dark color composition K2. A substrate was fabricated and a liquid crystal display device was fabricated.
[0210] (比較例 1〜2)  [0210] (Comparative Examples 1-2)
実施 ί列 1にお ヽて、インク No.1を前記表 2に示すインク No.100又は No.101に代 えたこと以外、実施例 1と同様にして、カラーフィルタ基板を作製すると共に、液晶表 示装置を作製した。  A color filter substrate was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that ink No. 1 was replaced with ink No. 100 or No. 101 shown in Table 2 in Example 1 and a liquid crystal substrate was prepared. A display device was produced.
[0211] (評価)  [0211] (Evaluation)
実施例及び比較例で得たカラーフィルタ基板及び液晶表示装置の各々につ ヽて、 以下に示す方法により評価を行なった。評価結果は下記表 4に示す。  Each of the color filter substrate and the liquid crystal display device obtained in the examples and comparative examples was evaluated by the following method. The evaluation results are shown in Table 4 below.
[0212] 1.平坦性 [0212] 1. Flatness
各カラーフィルタ基板について、濃色離画壁の端部から基板面と平行方向に 10 m以内における R画素、 G画素、 B画素での厚み (基板法線方向における厚み)の変 動幅を、触針式膜厚計 (P10、ケーエルエー'テンコール (株)製)で測定し、下記の 評価基準にしたがって評価した。 For each color filter substrate, the variation width of the thickness (thickness in the substrate normal direction) of the R pixel, G pixel, and B pixel within 10 m in the direction parallel to the substrate surface from the edge of the dark color separation wall, Measured with a stylus type film thickness meter (P10, manufactured by KLA-Tencor Co., Ltd.) Evaluation was performed according to the evaluation criteria.
[評価基準]  [Evaluation criteria]
Α:0.5 πι未満  Α: Less than 0.5 πι
Β:0.5 μ mJ¾_hO. 未満  Β: Less than 0.5 μmJ¾_hO.
C:0.55/zm以上  C: 0.55 / zm or more
[0213] -2.表示ムラ [0213] -2. Display unevenness
各液晶表示装置を通電して R, G, Bの各単色画像を表示してグレイのテスト信号を 入力し、画像表示したときの表示ムラをルーペにて観察し、下記評価基準にしたがつ て評価した。  Each liquid crystal display device is energized to display R, G, B monochromatic images, gray test signals are input, display irregularities when the images are displayed are observed with a loupe, and the following evaluation criteria are used. And evaluated.
[評価基準]  [Evaluation criteria]
A:全くムラがみられな力つた (非常に良!、)。  A: The power was completely uneven (very good!).
B:表示部に微かにムラがみられたが実用上許容範囲内であった (普通)。 C:表示部にムラがあった (悪!/、)。  B: Slight unevenness was observed on the display, but it was within a practically acceptable range (normal). C: The display area was uneven (bad! /).
[0214] [表 4] [0214] [Table 4]
インク 平坦性 [μ τη] Ink flatness [μ τη]
隔壁 表示ムラ No.  Bulkhead Display unevenness No.
R G Β 評価  R G Β evaluation
実施例 1 No. 1 転写 0.32 0.35 0.34 A A 実施例 2 No. 2 転写 0.43 0.42 0.44 A A 実施例 3 No. 3 転写 0.35 0.37 0.36 A A 実施例 4 No. 4 o 転写 0.46 0.48 0.44 A A 実施例 5 No. 5 転写 0.42 0.45 0.41 A A 実施例 6 No. 6 転写 0.46 0.42 0.47 A A 実施例 7 No. 7 転写 0.38 0.39 0.41 A A 実施例 8 No. 8 転写 0.44 0.43 0.45 A A 実施例 9 No. 9 転写 0.41 0.44 0.42 A A 実施例 1 0 No. 10 転写 0.40 0.41 0.42 A A 実施例 1 1 No. 1 1 転写 0.44 0.43 0.45 A A 実施例 1 2 No. 12 転写 0.47 0.46 0.44 A A 実施例 1 3 No. 13 転写 0.42 0.45 0.43 A A 実施例 1 4 No. 14 転写 0.43 0.44 0.45 A A 実施例 1 5 No. 15 転写 0.41 0.45 0.44 A A 実施例 1 6 No. 16 転写 0.39 0.41 0.41 A A 実施例 1 7 No. 1 布 0.37 0.39 0.41 A A 実施例 1 8 No. 1 転写 0.32 0.35 0.34 A A 比較例 1 耘写 0.71 0.72 0.75 C C 比較例 2 No. 101 転写 0.57 0.61 0.58 C C  Example 1 No. 1 Transfer 0.32 0.35 0.34 AA Example 2 No. 2 Transfer 0.43 0.42 0.44 AA Example 3 No. 3 Transfer 0.35 0.37 0.36 AA Example 4 No. 4 o Transfer 0.46 0.48 0.44 AA Example 5 No. 5 Transfer 0.42 0.45 0.41 AA Example 6 No. 6 Transfer 0.46 0.42 0.47 AA Example 7 No. 7 Transfer 0.38 0.39 0.41 AA Example 8 No. 8 Transfer 0.44 0.43 0.45 AA Example 9 No. 9 Transfer 0.41 0.44 0.42 AA Example 1 0 No. 10 Transfer 0.40 0.41 0.42 AA Example 1 1 No. 1 1 Transfer 0.44 0.43 0.45 AA Example 1 2 No. 12 Transfer 0.47 0.46 0.44 AA Example 1 3 No. 13 Transfer 0.42 0.45 0.43 AA Example 1 4 No. 14 transfer 0.43 0.44 0.45 AA Example 1 5 No. 15 transfer 0.41 0.45 0.44 AA Example 1 6 No. 16 transfer 0.39 0.41 0.41 AA Example 1 7 No. 1 cloth 0.37 0.39 0.41 AA Example 1 8 No. 1 Transfer 0.32 0.35 0.34 AA Comparative Example 1 Copy 0.71 0.72 0.75 CC Comparative Example 2 No. 101 Transfer 0.57 0.61 0.58 CC
前記表 4に示すように、実施例では、濃色離画壁間にインクを打滴して形成された R, G, B各色の着色画素部は平坦性に優れていた。また、実施例では、表示画像の 表示ムラの発生も認められず、表示品質の高い画像表示を行なうことができた。これ に対し、比較例では、着色画素部の平坦性に劣っており、表示画像には表示ムラが 発生してしまった。 日本出願 2005— 380199の開示はその全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれ る。 As shown in Table 4, in the examples, the colored pixel portions of the R, G, and B colors formed by ejecting ink between the dark color separation walls were excellent in flatness. Further, in the example, the occurrence of display unevenness of the display image was not recognized, and an image display with high display quality could be performed. On the other hand, in the comparative example, the flatness of the colored pixel portion was inferior, and display unevenness occurred in the display image. The disclosure of Japanese application 2005—380199 is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
本明細書に記載された全ての文献、特許出願、および技術規格は、個々の文献、 特許出願、および技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記さ れた場合と同程度に、本明細書中に参照により取り込まれる。  All documents, patent applications, and technical standards mentioned in this specification are to the same extent as if each individual document, patent application, and technical standard were specifically and individually stated to be incorporated by reference, Incorporated herein by reference.

Claims

請求の範囲 インクジェット法で液滴付与して形成される着色領域の形成に用いられるインクジェ ットカラ一フィルタ用インク組成物であって、 着色剤及びフッ素系界面活性剤を含み、前記フッ素系界面活性剤が、下記一般式 (a)で表されるモノマーに由来の構成単位 aの少なくとも一つと下記一般式 (b)で表さ れるモノマーに由来の構成単位 bの少なくとも一つとを有し、前記構成単位 aと構成 単位 bとの質量比(aZb)が 20Z80〜60Z40である共重合体であるインクジェット力 ラーフィルタ用インク組成物。 An ink composition for an inkjet color filter used for forming a colored region formed by applying droplets by an ink jet method, comprising a colorant and a fluorosurfactant, wherein the fluorosurfactant Having at least one of structural units a derived from the monomer represented by the following general formula (a) and at least one of structural units b derived from the monomer represented by the following general formula (b), An ink composition for an ink jet power filter, which is a copolymer having a mass ratio (aZb) of the unit a to the structural unit b of 20Z80 to 60Z40.
[化 1]  [Chemical 1]
Figure imgf000060_0001
Figure imgf000060_0001
〔式中、
Figure imgf000060_0002
R2、及び R3は各々独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。 R4は、水素 原子又は炭素数 1〜5のアルキル基を表す。 mは 2〜14の整数を表し、 nは 1〜18の 整数を表す。 p及び qは、各々独立に 0〜18の整数を表し、 pと qとが同時に 0を表す ことはない。〕
[Where,
Figure imgf000060_0002
R 2 and R 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. m represents an integer of 2 to 14, and n represents an integer of 1 to 18. p and q each independently represent an integer of 0 to 18, and p and q do not represent 0 at the same time. ]
[2] 前記フッ素系界面活性剤の含有量が、インク組成物の全質量の 0. 01〜0. 2質量 %であることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成 物。  [2] The ink composition for an inkjet color filter according to [1], wherein the content of the fluorosurfactant is 0.01 to 0.2% by mass of the total mass of the ink composition. .
[3] 前記構成単位 aの少なくとも一つは、 R1が水素原子であって、— C F が— C F m 2m+l 6 13 であって、 nが 2であるモノマーに由来の単位であることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載 のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物。 [3] At least one of the structural units a is a unit derived from a monomer in which R 1 is a hydrogen atom, —CF is —CF m 2m + l 6 13, and n is 2. The ink composition for an inkjet color filter according to claim 1.
[4] 前記構成単位 bの少なくとも一つは、 R2が水素原子であって、 R3カ チル基であつ て、 R4が水素原子であって、 pが 7であって、 qが 0であるモノマーに由来の単位であ ることを特徴とする請求項 1又は 3に記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成 物。 [4] At least one of the structural units b is such that R 2 is a hydrogen atom and is an R 3 cate group. 4. The ink composition for an inkjet color filter according to claim 1, wherein R 4 is a hydrogen atom, p is 7, and q is a unit derived from a monomer of 0. object.
[5] 前記構成単位 bの少なくとも一つは、 R2が水素原子であって、 R3が水素原子であつ て、 R4が水素原子であって、 pが 0であって、 qが 7であるモノマーに由来の単位であ ることを特徴とする請求項 1、 3又は 4に記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組 成物。 [5] At least one of the structural units b is as follows: R 2 is a hydrogen atom, R 3 is a hydrogen atom, R 4 is a hydrogen atom, p is 0, and q is 7 The ink composition for an inkjet color filter according to claim 1, wherein the ink composition is a unit derived from a monomer.
[6] 前記フッ素系界面活性剤が、 20〜60質量%の前記構成単位 aと 80〜40質量%の 前記構成単位 bとを含む 2元もしくは 3元以上の共重合体であることを特徴とする請求 項 1に記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物。  [6] The fluorinated surfactant is a binary or ternary copolymer containing 20 to 60% by mass of the structural unit a and 80 to 40% by mass of the structural unit b. The ink composition for an inkjet color filter according to claim 1.
[7] 前記構成単位 aの割合が 25〜60質量%であり、前記構成単位 bの割合が 60〜40 質量%であることを特徴とする請求項 6に記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク 組成物。 7. The ink composition for an inkjet color filter according to claim 6, wherein the proportion of the structural unit a is 25 to 60% by mass and the proportion of the structural unit b is 60 to 40% by mass. .
[8] 前記フッ素系界面活性剤の含有量が、インク組成物の全質量の 0. 05-0. 15質 量%であることを特徴とする請求項 2に記載のインクジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組 成物。  [8] The ink set for an inkjet color filter according to [2], wherein the content of the fluorosurfactant is 0.05 to 0.15% by mass of the total mass of the ink composition. Adult.
[9] 重合性化合物と重合開始剤とを更に含むことを特徴とする請求項 1に記載のインク ジェットカラーフィルタ用インク組成物。  [9] The ink composition for an ink jet color filter according to [1], further comprising a polymerizable compound and a polymerization initiator.
[10] 基板上に色相の異なる 2色以上の画素群と前記画素群を構成する各画素を互いに 離隔する遮光性の濃色離画壁とを有するカラーフィルタの製造方法であって、 前記濃色離画壁で離隔されている凹部に、請求項 1に記載のインクジェットカラー フィルタ用インク組成物をインクジェット法により付与して着色領域を形成する工程を 有するカラーフィルタの製造方法。 [10] A method for producing a color filter, comprising: a pixel group of two or more colors having different hues on a substrate; and a light-shielding dark color separation wall that separates the pixels constituting the pixel group from each other. A method for producing a color filter, comprising: forming a colored region by applying the ink composition for an ink-jet color filter according to claim 1 to the recesses separated by a color separation wall by an ink-jet method.
[11] 前記濃色離画壁の、基板法線方向における高さが 1. 0〜6. Ο /ζ mであることを特 徴とする請求項 10に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。 11. The method for producing a color filter according to claim 10, wherein the height of the dark color separation wall in the normal direction of the substrate is 1.0 to 6.Ο / ζ m.
[12] 前記濃色離画壁の端部から基板面と平行方向に 以内における着色領域の[12] The colored region within the parallel to the substrate surface from the edge of the dark color separation wall
、基板法線方向における厚みの変動幅が 0. 5 m以下である請求項 10に記載の力 ラーフィルタの製造方法。 11. The method for producing a power color filter according to claim 10, wherein the fluctuation range of the thickness in the substrate normal direction is 0.5 m or less.
[13] 前記着色領域を形成する工程で形成された少なくとも 1色の着色領域に活性光線 を照射して硬化する第 1の硬化工程を更に有することを特徴とする請求項 10に記載 のカラーフィルタの製造方法。 13. The color filter according to claim 10, further comprising a first curing step of irradiating at least one colored region formed in the step of forming the colored region with an actinic ray to cure. Manufacturing method.
[14] 前記第 1の硬化工程後に、赤色 (R)、緑色 (G)、及び青色 (B)を含む所望の色相 の着色領域の全てを熱により硬化する第 2の硬化工程を更に有することを特徴とする 請求項 13に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。 [14] After the first curing step, the method further includes a second curing step of curing all the colored regions having a desired hue including red (R), green (G), and blue (B) by heat. The method for producing a color filter according to claim 13.
[15] 請求項 10に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により作製されたカラーフィルタ。 15. A color filter produced by the method for producing a color filter according to claim 10.
[16] 請求項 15に記載のカラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示装置。 16. A liquid crystal display device comprising the color filter according to claim 15.
PCT/JP2006/325495 2005-12-28 2006-12-21 Ink-jet ink composition for color filter, color filter, process for producing the same, and liquid-crystal display WO2007077751A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2007552909A JPWO2007077751A1 (en) 2005-12-28 2006-12-21 Ink composition for inkjet color filter, color filter, method for producing the same, and liquid crystal display device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2005380199 2005-12-28
JP2005-380199 2005-12-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007077751A1 true WO2007077751A1 (en) 2007-07-12

Family

ID=38228106

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2006/325495 WO2007077751A1 (en) 2005-12-28 2006-12-21 Ink-jet ink composition for color filter, color filter, process for producing the same, and liquid-crystal display

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2007077751A1 (en)
KR (1) KR20080084842A (en)
CN (1) CN101346647A (en)
TW (1) TW200728416A (en)
WO (1) WO2007077751A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007323064A (en) * 2006-05-02 2007-12-13 Fujifilm Corp Method for manufacturing color filter, color filter and display device
EP2236570A3 (en) * 2009-03-31 2010-11-24 Fujifilm Corporation Ink composition, ink composition for inkjet recording, inkjet recording method, and printed article obtained by inkjet recording method
CN101445685B (en) * 2007-11-28 2012-05-30 精工爱普生株式会社 Color filter ink, color filter ink set and color filter

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI588142B (en) * 2012-07-31 2017-06-21 住友化學股份有限公司 Colored curable resin composition
CN109932771B (en) * 2019-02-18 2021-06-29 苏州星烁纳米科技有限公司 Preparation method of quantum dot color filter

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000310706A (en) * 1999-04-27 2000-11-07 Seiko Epson Corp Resin composition for ink-jet system color filter, color filter and manufacture of color filter
JP2003337424A (en) * 2002-05-20 2003-11-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image forming material

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000310706A (en) * 1999-04-27 2000-11-07 Seiko Epson Corp Resin composition for ink-jet system color filter, color filter and manufacture of color filter
JP2003337424A (en) * 2002-05-20 2003-11-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image forming material

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007323064A (en) * 2006-05-02 2007-12-13 Fujifilm Corp Method for manufacturing color filter, color filter and display device
CN101445685B (en) * 2007-11-28 2012-05-30 精工爱普生株式会社 Color filter ink, color filter ink set and color filter
EP2236570A3 (en) * 2009-03-31 2010-11-24 Fujifilm Corporation Ink composition, ink composition for inkjet recording, inkjet recording method, and printed article obtained by inkjet recording method
US8361603B2 (en) 2009-03-31 2013-01-29 Fujifilm Corporation Ink composition, ink composition for inkjet recording, inkjet recording method, and printed article obtained by inkjet recording method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN101346647A (en) 2009-01-14
JPWO2007077751A1 (en) 2009-06-11
TW200728416A (en) 2007-08-01
KR20080084842A (en) 2008-09-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5371245B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, display device member and manufacturing method thereof, black matrix, color filter and manufacturing method thereof, display device substrate, and display device
JP2007177179A (en) Ink, color filter and method of manufacturing the same and display apparatus
JP2011095716A (en) Colored photosensitive resin composition, method of manufacturing colored resin pattern, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
WO2007069593A1 (en) Method for producing partition wall for color filter, substrate with partition wall for color filter, color filter for display element, and display
WO2007077751A1 (en) Ink-jet ink composition for color filter, color filter, process for producing the same, and liquid-crystal display
JP2007323064A (en) Method for manufacturing color filter, color filter and display device
WO2016111338A1 (en) Photo-curable colored composition, cured product, and article
WO2007060857A1 (en) Method for manufacture of color filter, color filter, and display device
JP2007177015A (en) Active energy ray-curable ink for color filter, color filter and its production method, and liquid crystal display device
JP2007199665A (en) Color filter, manufacturing method therefor, inkjet ink for color filter, and display element
JP4837396B2 (en) Multilayer material and method for forming resin pattern
JP2007304534A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, partition and method for forming the same, optical element and method for manufacturing the same, and display device
JP4772482B2 (en) Color filter, manufacturing method thereof, and display device having color filter
JPWO2007094119A1 (en) Color filter manufacturing method, color filter, and display device having the color filter
JP2008164842A (en) Multilayer material, resin pattern forming method, substrate, display device, and liquid crystal display device
JP4762756B2 (en) Multilayer material and resin pattern forming method
JP2007178933A (en) Color filter, its manufacturing method, and display device
WO2023079622A1 (en) Inkjet ink for partition wall formation, inkjet ink set for partition wall formation, and led device manufacturing method
JP2007178929A (en) Color filter, its production method and liquid crystal display
JP5068603B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, partition wall and method for forming the same, color filter and method for manufacturing the same, and display device
JP2007183513A (en) Method for producing color filter, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
JP2015017205A (en) Photocurable colored composition, cured product and article
JP2007171656A (en) Color filter and its manufacturing method, and liquid crystal display
JP2007163689A (en) Method for manufacturing color filter, color filter and liquid crystal display device
JP2007178916A (en) Manufacturing method of color filter, color filter, and liquid crystal display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200680049152.4

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2007552909

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020087018108

Country of ref document: KR

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 06843003

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1